D81894GC10_ag.pdf

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a OTM 6.3 Core Competence or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Activity tu Guide n S Student a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

D81894GC10 Edition 1.0 January 2013 D84946

a

Copyright © 2014, 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Disclaimer This document contains proprietary information and is protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws. You may copy and print this document solely for your own use in an Oracle training course. The document may not be modified or altered in any way. Except where your use constitutes "fair use" under copyright law, you may not use, share, download, upload, copy, print, display, perform, reproduce, publish, license, post, transmit, or distribute this document in whole or in part without the express authorization of Oracle. The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. If you find any problems in the document, please report them in writing to: Oracle University, 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood Shores, California 94065 USA. This document is not warranted to be error-free. Restricted Rights Notice If this documentation is delivered to the United States Government or anyone using the documentation on behalf of the United States Government, the following notice is applicable: U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS The U.S. Government’s rights to use, modify, reproduce, release, perform, display, or disclose these training materials are restricted by the terms of the applicable Oracle license agreement and/or the applicable U.S. Government contract.

om c ฺ Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks leof theireฺ c respective owners. a or Guid @ t ut dent Authors m i th Stu n Julie Poindexter and Sheryl Slopey a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h Technical Contributors and Reviewers t r t aand Doug k e ( Julie Poindexter, Sheryl Slopey Leard s tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

s ) ha

Trademark Notice

K

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Table of Contents OTM 6.3 Core Competence Activity Guide ....................................................................................................1-1 Oracle Transportation Management 6.3 Core Competence Guided Demonstrations and Practices..............1-3 Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................1-4 Lesson 1: Course Overview ...........................................................................................................................1-5 Lesson 2: OTM Terminology ..........................................................................................................................1-6 Lesson 3: Navigating OTM .............................................................................................................................1-7 Guided Demonstration 1 - Logging into and Navigating in OTM ................................................................1-8 Practice 1 - Logging into OTM....................................................................................................................1-11 Solution – Logging into OTM ......................................................................................................................1-13 Practice 2 - Navigating the OTM Online Help.............................................................................................1-14 Solution – Navigating the OTM Online Help ...............................................................................................1-15 Practice 3 - Creating an OTM Nickname ....................................................................................................1-16 Solution – Creating an OTM Nickname ......................................................................................................1-17 Guided Demonstration 2 - Viewing Additional OTM Resources .................................................................1-18 Lesson 4: Adding and Retrieving OTM Data ..................................................................................................1-22 Guided Demonstration 1 - Searching in OTM ............................................................................................1-23 Guided Demonstration 2 - Adding and Editing Records .............................................................................1-25 Guided Demonstration 3 - Creating and Running Saved Queries ..............................................................1-28 Practice 1 - Querying for Records ..............................................................................................................1-29 Solution – Querying for Records ................................................................................................................1-30 Practice 2 - Adding and Editing Records ....................................................................................................1-31 Solution – Adding and Editing Records ......................................................................................................1-33 Practice 3 - Creating Saved Queries ..........................................................................................................1-34 Solution – Creating Saved Queries ............................................................................................................1-35 Lesson 5: Setting OTM Preferences ..............................................................................................................1-36 Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating and Viewing Business Monitors .........................................................1-37 Practice 1 - Copying and Editing User Preferences ...................................................................................1-39 Solution – Copying and Editing User Preferences .....................................................................................1-40 Practice 2 - Assigning User Preferences ....................................................................................................1-41 Solution – Assigning User Preferences ......................................................................................................1-42 Lesson 6: Customizing OTM ..........................................................................................................................1-43 Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Custom Manager Layouts, Screen Sets and Menus ...........................1-44 Guided Demonstration 2 - Viewing Results of Customization ....................................................................1-47 Guided Demonstration 3 - Working with Advanced Layouts. .....................................................................1-50 Lesson 7: Business Scenario: Creating and Orders and Planning Shipments in OTM ..................................1-51 Lesson 8: Managing Orders in OTM ..............................................................................................................1-52 Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Order Releases with Line Items ..........................................................1-53 Guided Demonstration 2 - Viewing Order Releases with Ship Units ..........................................................1-55 Practice 1 - Creating Order Releases with Line Items ................................................................................1-57 Solution – Creating Order Releases with Line Items ..................................................................................1-60 Lesson 9: Viewing OTM Statuses ..................................................................................................................1-61 Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Order Release Statuses......................................................................1-62 Practice 1 - Viewing Order Release Statuses ............................................................................................1-63 Solution – Viewing Order Release Statuses...............................................................................................1-64 Lesson 10: Planning Shipments .....................................................................................................................1-65 Guided Demonstration 1 - Planning Multi-stop Shipments .........................................................................1-66

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Student Guide Table of Contents i

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Guided Demonstration 2 - Mapping Multi-stop Shipments .........................................................................1-69 Practice 1 - Planning Multi-stop Shipments ................................................................................................1-71 Solution – Planning Multi-stop Shipments ..................................................................................................1-72 Practice 2 - Mapping Shipments ................................................................................................................1-73 Solution – Mapping Shipments...................................................................................................................1-74 Practice 3 - Viewing Order Statuses ..........................................................................................................1-75 Solution – Viewing Order Statuses .............................................................................................................1-76 Lesson 11: Manually Modifying Shipments ....................................................................................................1-77 Guided Demonstration 1 - Changing Service Providers .............................................................................1-78 Practice 1 - Changing Service Providers ....................................................................................................1-79 Solution – Changing Service Providers ......................................................................................................1-80 Lesson 12: Tendering Shipments...................................................................................................................1-81 Guided Demonstration 1 - Tendering Shipments and Accepting Tenders .................................................1-82 Guided Demonstration 2 - Sending Open Tenders ....................................................................................1-84 Practice 1 - Tendering Shipments ..............................................................................................................1-85 Solution – Tendering Shipments ................................................................................................................1-86 Practice 2 - Accepting Tenders ..................................................................................................................1-87 Solution – Accepting Tenders ....................................................................................................................1-88 Lesson 13: Entering Shipment Tracking Events ............................................................................................1-89 Guided Demonstration 1 - Entering Shipment Tracking Events and Viewing Stop Times ..........................1-90 Practice 1 - Entering Shipment Tracking Events ........................................................................................1-92 Solution – Entering Shipment Tracking Events ..........................................................................................1-93 Practice 2 - Viewing Stop Times on the Shipment .....................................................................................1-94 Solution – Viewing Stop Times on the Shipment........................................................................................1-95 Lesson 14: Visibility for Orders and Shipments ..............................................................................................1-96 Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Order and Shipment Information .........................................................1-97 Practice 1 - Tracking and Tracing Shipments.............................................................................................1-98 Solution – Tracking and Tracing Shipments ...............................................................................................1-99 Practice 2 - Viewing Public Tracking Information .......................................................................................1-100 Solution - Viewing Public Tracking Information ..........................................................................................1-101 Lesson 15: Business Scenario: Configuring OTM to Build and Tender a Multi-stop Shipment ......................1-102 Lesson 16: Creating Locations and Corporations ..........................................................................................1-103 Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Locations ...........................................................................................1-104 Practice 1 - Creating Locations ..................................................................................................................1-106 Solution – Creating Locations ....................................................................................................................1-108 Lesson 17: Creating Calendars ......................................................................................................................1-109 Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Calendars ..........................................................................................1-110 Practice 1 - Creating Calendars .................................................................................................................1-111 Solution – Creating Calendars ...................................................................................................................1-113 Lesson 18: Creating Contacts ........................................................................................................................1-114 Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Contacts.............................................................................................1-115 Practice 1 - Creating Contacts ...................................................................................................................1-116 Solution – Creating Contacts......................................................................................................................1-117 Lesson 19: Creating Commodities and Items ................................................................................................1-118 Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Commodities ......................................................................................1-119 Practice 1 - Creating Commodities .............................................................................................................1-120 Solution – Creating Commodities ...............................................................................................................1-121 Guided Demonstration 2 - Viewing Items and Packaged Items .................................................................1-122 Practice 2 - Creating Items .........................................................................................................................1-124

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Student Guide Table of Contents ii

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Solution – Creating Items ...........................................................................................................................1-126 Lesson 20: Creating Equipment Groups and Equipment Group Profiles .......................................................1-127 Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Equipment Groups .............................................................................1-128 Practice 1 - Creating Equipment Groups ....................................................................................................1-129 Solution – Creating Equipment Groups ......................................................................................................1-130 Guided Demonstration 2 - Creating Equipment Group Profiles ..................................................................1-131 Practice 2 - Creating Equipment Group Profiles.........................................................................................1-132 Solution – Creating Equipment Group Profiles ...........................................................................................1-133 Practice 3 - Assigning Equipment Group Profiles .......................................................................................1-134 Solution – Assigning Equipment Group Profiles .........................................................................................1-135 Lesson 21: Creating Service Providers ..........................................................................................................1-136 Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Service Providers ...............................................................................1-137 Practice 1 - Creating Service Providers......................................................................................................1-139 Solution – Creating Service Providers ........................................................................................................1-140 Practice 2 - Adding Service Provider Contacts...........................................................................................1-141 Solution – Adding Service Provider Contacts .............................................................................................1-142 Practice 3 - Adding Service Provider Contact Details ................................................................................1-143 Solution – Adding Service Provider Contact Details ...................................................................................1-146 Lesson 22: Configuring Contact Notification ..................................................................................................1-147 Guided Demonstration 1 - Configuring Contact Notification .......................................................................1-148 Practice 1 - Configuring Contact Notification ..............................................................................................1-149 Solution – Configuring Contact Notification ................................................................................................1-150 Lesson 23: Configuring Automation Agents ...................................................................................................1-151 Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Automation Agents .............................................................................1-152 Practice 1 - Creating Automation Agents ...................................................................................................1-153 Solution – Creating an Automation Agent ..................................................................................................1-154 Lesson 24: Contract Management .................................................................................................................1-155 Lesson 25: Configuring Rate Distance ...........................................................................................................1-156 Guided Demonstration 1 - Configuring Rate Distances ..............................................................................1-157 Lesson 26: Configuring Rate Service .............................................................................................................1-159 Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Rate Services ....................................................................................1-160 Practice 1 - Creating Rate Services for Truckload .....................................................................................1-163 Solution – Creating Rate Services for Truckload........................................................................................1-164 Lesson 27: Creating Rate Offerings for Truckload .........................................................................................1-165 Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Rate Offerings....................................................................................1-166 Practice 1 - Creating Rate Offerings for Truckload .....................................................................................1-168 Solution – Creating Rate Offerings for Truckload .......................................................................................1-170 Lesson 28: Creating Rate Records for Truckload ..........................................................................................1-171 Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Rate Records .....................................................................................1-172 Practice 1 - Creating Rate Records for Truckload ......................................................................................1-174 Solution – Creating Rate Records for Truckload ........................................................................................1-176 Lesson 29: Configuring Rate Preference and Rate Quality Factor.................................................................1-177 Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating and Enabling Rate Preferences .........................................................1-178 Practice 1 - Creating and Enabling Rate Preferences ................................................................................1-180 Solution – Creating and Enabling Rate Preferences ..................................................................................1-181 Guided Demonstration 2 - Creating and Assigning a Rate Quality.............................................................1-182 Practice 2 - Creating a Rate Quality ...........................................................................................................1-183 Solution – Creating a Rate Quality .............................................................................................................1-184 Practice 3 - Assigning a Rate Quality .........................................................................................................1-185

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Student Guide Table of Contents iii

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Solution – Assigning a Rate Quality ...........................................................................................................1-186 Lesson 30: Querying for Truckload Rates .....................................................................................................1-187 Practice 1 - Querying for Truckload Rates .................................................................................................1-188 Solution – Querying for Truckload Rates ...................................................................................................1-189 Lesson 31: Creating Rate Offerings and Rate Records for Less Than Truckload .........................................1-190 Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Weight Break Profiles ........................................................................1-191 Guided Demonstration 2 - Viewing Base Rate Offerings and Creating Rate Records ...............................1-192 Guided Demonstration 3 - Viewing Master Rate Offerings and Rate Records ...........................................1-194 Practice 1 - Creating Master Rate Offerings...............................................................................................1-195 Solution – Creating Master Rate Offerings .................................................................................................1-196 Practice 2 - Creating Master Rate Records ................................................................................................1-197 Solution – Creating Master Rate Records ..................................................................................................1-199 Lesson 32: Creating Itineraries ......................................................................................................................1-200 Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Itineraries ............................................................................................1-201 Practice 1 - Creating Multi-stop Itineraries .................................................................................................1-203 Solution – Creating Multi-stop Itineraries....................................................................................................1-204 Practice 2 - Querying Route and Rates ......................................................................................................1-205 Solution – Querying Route and Rates ........................................................................................................1-207 Lesson 33: Creating and Releasing Order Bases ..........................................................................................1-208 Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Order Bases........................................................................................1-209 Guided Demonstration 2 - Releasing Order Bases with Line Items ...........................................................1-211 Practice 1 - Creating Order Bases with Line Items .....................................................................................1-212 Solution – Creating Order Bases with Line Items .......................................................................................1-215 Lesson 34: Bulk Planning Order Releases .....................................................................................................1-216 Guided Demonstration 1 - Bulk Planning Order Releases .........................................................................1-217 Practice 1 - Bulk Planning Order Releases ................................................................................................1-220 Solution – Bulk Planning Order Releases ..................................................................................................1-222 Lesson 35: Re-sequencing Shipment Stops ..................................................................................................1-223 Guided Demonstration 1 - Re-sequencing Stops .......................................................................................1-224 Practice 1 - Re-sequencing Stops ..............................................................................................................1-225 Solution – Re-sequencing Stops ................................................................................................................1-227 Practice 2 - Tendering Shipments ..............................................................................................................1-228 Solution – Tendering Shipments ................................................................................................................1-229 Practice 3 - Declining a Tender as Service Provider ..................................................................................1-230 Solution – Declining Tender as Service Provider .......................................................................................1-231 Practice 4 - Viewing the Status of Shipments as Transport Planner ..........................................................1-232 Solution – Viewing the Status of Shipments as Transport Planner ............................................................1-234 Practice 5 - Accepting Tenders and Viewing Shipment Status...................................................................1-235 Solution – Accepting Tenders and Viewing Shipment Status .....................................................................1-236 Lesson 36: Business Scenario: Building a Multi-leg Shipment .......................................................................1-237 Lesson 37: Viewing Public Data ....................................................................................................................1-238 Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Public Locations ..................................................................................1-239 Practice 1 - Viewing Public Locations ........................................................................................................1-240 Solution – Viewing Public Locations ...........................................................................................................1-241 Lesson 38: Viewing Items .............................................................................................................................1-242 Practice 1 - Viewing Items ..........................................................................................................................1-243 Solution – Viewing Items ............................................................................................................................1-244 Lesson 39: Viewing Equipment Groups and Equipment Group Profiles for Ocean ........................................1-245 Practice 1 - Viewing Equipment Groups and Equipment Group Profiles for Ocean ...................................1-246

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Student Guide Table of Contents iv

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Solution – Viewing Equipment Groups and Equipment Group Profiles for Ocean .....................................1-247 Lesson 40: Viewing Service Providers and Rate Offerings for Truckload Leg One.......................................1-248 Practice 1 - Viewing Service Providers and Rate Offerings for Truckload Leg One ...................................1-249 Solution – Viewing Service Providers and Rate Offerings for Truckload Leg One .....................................1-250 Lesson 41: Creating Rate Offerings and Rate Records for Vessel ...............................................................1-251 Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Rate Offering and Rate Records for Vessel ........................................1-252 Practice 1 - Creating a Rate Offering for Vessel ........................................................................................1-254 Solution – Creating a Rate Offering for Vessel...........................................................................................1-255 Practice 2 - Creating a Rate Record for Vessel..........................................................................................1-256 Solution – Creating a Rate Record for Vessel ............................................................................................1-257 Lesson 42: Defining Accessorials and Special Services ..............................................................................1-258 Guided Demonstration 1 - Defining Accessorials or Special Services .......................................................1-259 Guided Demonstration 2 - Defining Accessorials .......................................................................................1-261 Guided Demonstration 3 - Defining Special Services .................................................................................1-263 Practice 1 - Defining Accessorials on a Rate Record .................................................................................1-264 Solution – Defining Accessorials on a Rate Record ...................................................................................1-265 Lesson 43: Viewing Rate Offerings and Rate Records for the Final Truckload Leg .......................................1-266 Practice 1 - Viewing Service Providers and Rate Offerings for the Final Truckload Leg ............................1-267 Solution – Viewing Service Providers and Rate Offerings for the Final Truckload Leg ..............................1-268 Lesson 44: Querying for Truckload and Vessel Rates ...................................................................................1-269 Practice 1 - Querying for Truckload and Vessel Rates ...............................................................................1-270 Solution – Querying for Truckload and Vessel Rates .................................................................................1-272 Lesson 45: Creating Multi-leg Itineraries .......................................................................................................1-273 Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Itinerary Leg Details for a Multi-leg Itinerary .......................................1-274 Practice 1 - Creating a Multi-leg Itinerary ...................................................................................................1-276 Solution – Creating a Multi-leg Itinerary .....................................................................................................1-278 Lesson 46: Querying for Route and Rates .....................................................................................................1-279 Practice 1 - Querying for Route and Rates.................................................................................................1-280 Solution – Querying for Route and Rates ...................................................................................................1-281 Lesson 47: Configuring Auto Assignment Rules ...........................................................................................1-282 Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Auto Assignment Rules.......................................................................1-283 Practice 1 - Configuring Auto Assignment Rules........................................................................................1-284 Solution – Configuring Auto Assignment Rules ..........................................................................................1-285 Lesson 48: Creating Order Releases .............................................................................................................1-286 Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Order Releases ...................................................................................1-287 Practice 1 - Creating Order Releases ........................................................................................................1-289 Solution – Creating Order Releases ...........................................................................................................1-291 Lesson 49: Configuring Audit Trail .................................................................................................................1-292 Guided Demonstration 1 - Configuring Audit Trail ......................................................................................1-293 Lesson 50: Planning a Multi-leg Shipment .....................................................................................................1-295 Practice 1 - Planning Multi-leg Shipments ..................................................................................................1-296 Solution – Planning Multi-leg Shipments ....................................................................................................1-298 Lesson 51: Viewing Order Movements ..........................................................................................................1-299 Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Order Movements ...............................................................................1-300 Practice 1 - Viewing Order Movements ......................................................................................................1-302 Solution – Viewing Order Movements ........................................................................................................1-303 Lesson 52: Network Routing ..........................................................................................................................1-304 Appendix A: Viewing OTM Log Files ..............................................................................................................1-305 Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing the System Log File ............................................................................1-306

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Student Guide Table of Contents v

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Guided Demonstration 2 - Creating a User Log File ..................................................................................1-309 Appendix B: Importing and Exporting Static Data via CSV ...........................................................................1-311 Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing the Data Dictionary .............................................................................1-312 Guided Demonstration 2 - Exporting CSV Data .........................................................................................1-314 Practice 1 - Exporting an OTM Corporation as a CSV File.........................................................................1-316 Solution – Exporting an OTM Corporation as a CSV File ...........................................................................1-317 Practice 2 - Editing the Corporation CSV File ............................................................................................1-318 Solution – Editing the Corporation CSV File...............................................................................................1-319 Guided Demonstration 3 - Importing a CSV File ........................................................................................1-320 Practice 3 - Importing Your Edited Corporation CSV File ...........................................................................1-322 Solution - Importing Your Edited Corporation CSV File ..............................................................................1-323 Practice 4 - Verifying New Corporation Now Exists in OTM .......................................................................1-324 Solution - Verifying New Corporation Now Exists in OTM ..........................................................................1-325 Appendix C1: Configuring Pre-scheduled Milk Runs......................................................................................1-326 Appendix C2: Creating Trip Templates ..........................................................................................................1-327 Guided Demonstration 1 - Copying a Static Trip Template ........................................................................1-328 Guided Demonstration 2 - Creating a Dynamic Trip Template ...................................................................1-330 Guided Demonstration 3 - Creating an Itinerary and a Rate Offering .........................................................1-332 Appendix C3: Working with Templates ..........................................................................................................1-334 Guided Demonstration 1 - Generating Trips...............................................................................................1-335 Guided Demonstration 2 - Planning Order Releases .................................................................................1-337 Guided Demonstration 3 - Releasing Trips ................................................................................................1-338 Guided Demonstration 4 - Adding Order Releases to a Trip ......................................................................1-339

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Student Guide Table of Contents vi

a

Preface

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Profile Before You Begin This Course Before you begin this course, you should be able to: • Explain the transport process of your company • Understand the basics of transportation and logistics processes How This Course Is Organized OTM 6.3 Core Competence is an instructor-led course featuring lecture and hands-on exercises. Online demonstrations and written practice sessions reinforce the concepts and skills introduced.

s ) ha

Related Publications

om c ฺ Oracle Publications le eฺ c a Title Number orPartG uid @ t t utE38415-02 Oracle Transportation Management Administration Guide n e m i Release 6.3 h Stud t n ika Release Oracle Transportation Management Installation Guide l this E38416-02 u h 6.3 ฺ e ik o us h t r Oracle Transportation Management Migration a se tGuide Release 6.3 E38417-02 k ( n Architecture Guide E38415-02 tt cTechnical Oracle Transportation Management e u i m l Release 6.3 hi ble t n ra Oracle Transportation Branding Guide Release 6.3 E38421-02 lika sfeManagement u H an Management Data Management Guide E38426-02 Oracle k Transportation r i t h t rRelease no6.3n Ka ®

®

® ®

® ®

Oracle® Transportation Management Integration Guide Release 6.3

E38428-02

Oracle® Transportation Management Kewill Flagship Parcel Rate E38429-01 Requests Integration Guide Release 6.3 Oracle® Transportation Management Order Management Guide Release 6.3

E38432-01

Oracle® Transportation Management Report Designer’s Guide Release 6.3

E38433-01

Oracle® Transportation Management Application Scalability Guide E38434-02 Release 6.3 Oracle® Global Trade Management Oracle E-Business Suite Integration Guide Release 6.3

E38425-01

Oracle® Global Trade Management Customs Filing Integration Guide Release 6.3

E38424-02

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Student Guide Table of Contents vii

a

Oracle® In-Memory Logistics Command Center Administration Guide Release 6.3

E41869-01

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Oracle® In-Memory Logistics Command Center Installation Guide E41870-01 Release 6.3 Oracle® In-Memory Logistics Command Center Technical Architecture Guide Release 6.3

E41872-01

OTM, GTM, and LCC Documentation Library for all 6.3.x releases: E38437-01 6.3, 6.3.1, 6.3.2, etc. Additional Publications • Installation ReadMe • All of the documents listed above are available from Oracle Technology Network (OTN) at http://www.oracle.com/technology/documentation/index.html. • Due to confidentiality reasons, the following documents are only available via the installer or My Oracle Support in knowledge document 796594.1: − Security Guide − Data Dictionary − Data Dictionary Diagrams − Data Dictionary ReadMe − Structural Changes Guide − External Programming Interface Guide − OAM Integration Guide − XML Interface Changes − XML Elements Dictionary − XML Schemas − XSD ReadMe − FTI ODI Interfaces Guide − FTI Reference Guide − LCC Oracle Data Integrator Interfaces Guide − LCC Reference Guide

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Student Guide Table of Contents viii

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t t OTM 6.3 Core ut Competence n e m i hGuide ud t Activity t n S ika 1 this l u Chapter ฺh use k i h art se to k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle Transportation Management 6.3 Core Competence Guided Demonstrations and Practices Chapter 1 - Page 1

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle Transportation Management 6.3 Core Competence Guided Demonstrations and Practices Chapter 1 - Page 2

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Oracle Transportation Management 6.3 Core Competence Guided Demonstrations and Practices

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle Transportation Management 6.3 Core Competence Guided Demonstrations and Practices Chapter 1 - Page 3

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Objectives

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Objectives Chapter 1 - Page 4

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Lesson 1: Course Overview

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 1: Course Overview Chapter 1 - Page 5

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Lesson 2: OTM Terminology

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 2: OTM Terminology Chapter 1 - Page 6

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Lesson 3: Navigating OTM

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 3: Navigating OTM Chapter 1 - Page 7

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Guided Demonstration 1 - Logging into and Navigating in OTM Logging In To log into OTM, you need a user name and a password: 1. Open a browser. 2. Go to the URL provided by the instructor. 3. Enter your User Name. The format of your User Name is DOMAIN.USER. You can also define nicknames for each user. 4. Enter the Password. 5. Click Login. • At the top of the page, you can see the welcome area of OTM. This area displays the OTM version, the user name, the user role, and links to access other areas of OTM. • On the left side of the page, you can see the OTM navigation menu. The menu provides access to all areas of OTM.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺmenu 6. Click the collapse button ( ) near the bottom of the menu to togglera thecnavigation o Guid off. @ t ut dent m i h navigation tthe 7. Click the collapse button ( ) a second time to toggle tu menu back on. n S a lik this Displays what vers ion ofu h ฺ e k s OTM you are using. i u h Displays the user you are t r o t a logged into OTM as. (k nse t t u lice m i th able n a ulik nsfer Toggles the Welcome area on H a k r i and off. t arth non-

K

The main menu. Toggles the Ask Oracle menu on and off. Toggles the main menu on and off.

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Logging into and Navigating in OTM Chapter 1 - Page 8

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

8. 9.

10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.

) to the far right of the Ask Oracle toolbar. Click the collapse button ( ) a second time to display the Ask Oracle toolbar again. Click the collapse button ( The Ask Oracle toolbar provides quick access to certain information, such as rates and locations. Can be on or off by default based on user preferences. Click the Information link at the top right. OTM displays information such as user, version, URL, and database. Close the Information window. Click the Help link to access help. Help displays the OTM online help. Close the OTM online help. Click the Logout icon to log out of OTM. OTM logs you out but gives you the option to log in again. Log back into OTM. At the top of the page, you can see a link for the Message Center. The Message Center is a centralized message board that displays messages when specific events occur. The Message Center is available at the top of the OTM page.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent Using Online Help m i th Stu 16. In the main menu, click Help > Help. n a lik t6.3 OTM displays the Oracle Transportation Management hisHelp page. There are four tabs in u h ฺ e the left pane: Contents, Index, Search, s The Contents tab lists menu options ikand oGlossary. u and specific features of OTM. rth t a Management k e ( s 17. In the help window, clicktShipment > Location Manager. t n e u c Oracle Transportation li 6.3 Help displays an overview of the Location im Management h e t l Manager: Identification tab. n rab lika the 18. Scrolluthrough fetext and click on the link for Region ID. s H n ikThe right-hand tra pane now displays regions information. h t n r a 19. Click nothe Index tab. 20. Enter calendar in the text field. OTM help displays index entries starting with the word calendar. 21. Click the Search tab. 22. Enter calendar in the text field and press Enter. OTM displays a list of those help pages containing the word calendar. You can enter multiple words to search for. Topics with the most matches are ranked first. 23. Click the Glossary tab. OTM displays a glossary of OTM and transportation-related terms. 24. Click the Hide Contents icon in the upper right of the help topic. The left pane is hidden. 25. Click the Show Contents icon to display the left pane again. The left pane is displayed. 26. Scroll down to the bottom of the left pane. 27. Click Send Us Your Comments. Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Logging into and Navigating in OTM Chapter 1 - Page 9

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

28. 29. 30.

31.

Notice the links which include: • A link to send an email to the OTM documentation team. Use this link if you have a question or concern with this exact help topic. • A link to Oracle’s My Oracle Support (previously MetaLink) which you can use to enter a service request which will be addressed by the OTM technical support staff. • A link to find the support phone number for your region. Close the OTM online help. On the main menu, click Shipment Management > Location Manager. At the very top of the page, click Help on the top menu bar. OTM displays the help topic specific to this page. Since search pages are very generic, a common topic for Search Business Objects appears. In the blue bar under the title, click Search by Status. This section of the help topic displays without you having to scroll down the page. At the end of the topic is an up arrow that returns you to the top of the help topic. Scroll down to the bottom of the help topic. Notice the links at the bottom of the topic. These are the same links as in the Send Us Your Comments topic. These links are on every help topic. Close the OTM online help. These are just some of the features offered by the OTM online help. OTM online help is very extensive. It is recommended that you refer to the help throughout the class. In a later exercise, you will see additional examples of context-sensitive help.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid 33. @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us Creating a Nickname h t r aOTM asseantalternative to user ID. For example, a standard You can use a nickname to log into k ( tt cen However, with a nickname, you can enter the user name is comprised ofu DOMAIN.USER. m li nickname instead of h DOMAIN.USER. i e t l 34. Click Configuration an erand abAdministration > User Management > User Manager. k i l f 35. Click atsthe bottom of the page. HuSearch n a k r i -t the Users results page. th OTModisplays n ar36. Click n the ID. 32.

K

OTM displays the User page. Note the breadcrumb trail at the top of the page (under the blue bar above the page name). This allows you to go back without using the Back button. Note the nickname for this user. You can use this nickname each time you log into OTM.

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Logging into and Navigating in OTM Chapter 1 - Page 10

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Practice 1 - Logging into OTM Logging into OTM Note: This training instance may be a different version of OTM than you are running at your site. 1. Open your browser and type in the OTM URL to access the server. Note: The URL must be in the format of http://:7777/GC3/glog.webserver.servlet.umt.Login. Due to issues with Windows Server 2008, you are required to enter the entire URL shown above. To make it easier to access this URL throughout the class, it is recommended you create a favorite in Internet Explorer. 2. Log into OTM by entering your User Name and Password. Important: Your instructor will provide each student with your own user name and password that allows you access to your own OTM domain. Note: Each student MUST have their own user name and password to a separate OTM domain. There are thirty staged domains for the Core Competence class: CORE101.ADMIN through CORE130.ADMIN. They all use the same password of CHANGEME. Assign one domain to each student with a computer in the class. If multiple students are using one computer, you should assign one domain per computer. 3. Click Login. OTM displays the OTM main page.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a s 4. Click the Collapse button ( ) at the bottom menu. thinavigation uliofktheemain h ฺ OTM hides the main menu. ik o us h t r a se t k ( 5. Click the Collapse/Restore again ( ) to display the menu. n tt button e u c i m l 6. Click Information hion thebtop e menu bar. t l n OTM displays ra Information page. ka thefOTM i l e u s 7. Enter H the software n version you are using: a k r i t Field Enter Your Results arth non-

K

Software Version

8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.

Close the OTM Information page. Click the Logout link on the top menu bar. OTM logs you out. Click the Login again to OTM link. Enter your User Name and Password. Click Login. OTM displays the OTM main page. Click the Shipment Management menu option. OTM displays a sub-menu. Click the Location Manager sub-menu option. OTM displays the location search page.

15. Click the Collapse arrow ( ) next to the bottom menu bar. OTM hides the Ask Oracle toolbar. Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Logging into OTM Chapter 1 - Page 11

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

16. Click the Collapse arrow ( ) a second time to display the Oracle toolbar. You will use the Oracle toolbar throughout the class.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Logging into OTM Chapter 1 - Page 12

a

Solution – Logging into OTM You successfully logged into OTM and performed some actions. Logging into OTM

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Field

Software Version

Enter Your Results Otmv631

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Logging into OTM Chapter 1 - Page 13

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Practice 2 - Navigating the OTM Online Help Navigating the OTM Online Help 1. In the main menu, click Help > Help. OTM displays the Oracle Transportation Management 6.3 Help page. There are four tabs in the left pane: Contents, Index, Search, and Glossary. The Contents tab lists menu options and specific features of Help such as Flow Topics. 2. In the help window Contents tab, click Shipment Management > Location Manager. OTM online help displays an overview of the Location Manager: Identification tab. 3. Scroll through the text and click on the link for Region ID. The right-hand pane now displays regions information. 4. Click the Index tab. 5. Enter calendar in the text field. 6. Click on the word calendars and the sub-entries, such as activity definitions. OTM online help only displays topics that have a keyword or sub-keyword of calendar. 7. Click the Search tab. Note: If you do not see the entire “Type in the word(s) to search for:” field or the check box underneath it, you can expand the search pane by holding the mouse pointer over the pane divider and then dragging the divider to the right once you see the double-sided arrow. 8. Enter calendar in the text field and press Enter. OTM online help displays a list of those help pages where the word calendar appears. You can enter multiple words to search for. 9. Click the Glossary tab. OTM online help displays a glossary of OTM and transportation-related terms. 10. Click Hide Contents in the upper right of the help topic. The left pane is hidden. 11. Click Show Contents. The left pane is displayed. 12. Close the OTM online help. 13. Click Shipment Management > Location Manager. OTM displays the Location Finder page; also known as a search page. 14. Click the Help link on the top menu bar. The help topic specific to this page appears. Since search windows are very generic, a common search topic appears. 15. In the blue bar under the title, click Search by Date. The Search by Date section of the help topic displays without you having to scroll down the page. At the bottom right of the topic is an up arrow that returns to the top of the topic. 16. Close the OTM online help.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 2 - Navigating the OTM Online Help Chapter 1 - Page 14

a

Solution – Navigating the OTM Online Help

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Navigating the OTM Online Help You have successfully navigated through the OTM online help.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Navigating the OTM Online Help Chapter 1 - Page 15

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Practice 3 - Creating an OTM Nickname Creating an OTM Nickname 1. Click Configuration and Administration > User Management > User Manager. OTM displays the User search tab. 2. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Users results page. 3. Click the ID. OTM displays the User page. 4. Enter a Nickname. It cannot be the same as the Domain name. Note: Enter the nickname in capital letters. 5. Click Finished. OTM displays the results page. 6. Log out of OTM. 7. Log back into OTM using your new nickname. You can use your nickname for the remainder of this class. You do not need to type .ADMIN after a nickname.

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

s ) ha

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 3 - Creating an OTM Nickname Chapter 1 - Page 16

a

Solution – Creating an OTM Nickname

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Creating an OTM Nickname You have successfully created an OTM nickname and used it to log into OTM.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Creating an OTM Nickname Chapter 1 - Page 17

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Guided Demonstration 2 - Viewing Additional OTM Resources Viewing How To Procedures How To procedures are a series of HTML pages which include step-by-step procedures on how to configure certain OTM functionality. The How To procedures are written using Oracle Tutor Author and Oracle Tutor Publisher. The How To procedures cover the following topics: • Outbound Multistop Scenario • Configuring BNG • EBS to OTM • E1 to OTM 1. Click Help > How To. 2. Click the link for Configuring BNG. 3. Click the link for Creating a New Business Number Rule Definition. 4. Scroll down to view the steps. 5. Close the How To window.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a id or Viewing the OTM Documentation and Training My Oracle Support Notes Gu @ t t ut release. n There is an Oracle My Oracle Support note released for eachm OTM These notes e i hTransportation ud Management release. t describe the published information available for an Oracle t n S Use this document to ensure that you leverage allliexisting ka tresources is to learn about, install, h u implement, and use OTM. ฺh use k i h 6. Go to www.oracle.com. art se to 7. Click the SUPPORT link. t (k nOracle Support to Login. t clickcMy e u 8. Under Support Resources, i m l hi Support. t le 9. Log into My n Oracle b a a k er Knowledge Base’, enter the note number you want to view: 10. Where itlisays ‘Search f u s H an k796594.1. r i t h t n magnifying glass to the right of the number you entered. r nothe Ka 11. Click 12. Click the link for Oracle Transportation Management and Global Trade Management Version 6.x Documentation and Training Resources. You see the note. The Oracle Transportation Management Documentation and Training Resources note contains links to the following resources as well as details on how to access each of these resources: Note: New documents can be added for any release so there may be additional documents. • Transfer of Information (TOI) Online Training • Oracle University Course-ware • Oracle Transportation Management Library links for different versions. • List of documents only available via the installer or this note. • EBS-OTM Integration Guide Viewing the OTM Documentation Library Following are some of the documents included on the Oracle Technology Network page: • Installation ReadMe Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 2 - Viewing Additional OTM Resources Chapter 1 - Page 18

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

13.

• Administration Guide • Installation Guide • Migration Guide • Technical Architecture Guide • Branding Guide • Data Management Guide • Integration Guide • Kewill Flagship Parcel Rate Requests Integration Guide • Order Management Guide • Report Designer’s Guide • Application Scalability Guide: • GTM – Oracle E-Business Suite Integration Guide Still in the note, scroll down to the section with the text of “The documents listed to the right are included on the Oracle Technology Network page.” Click the View Library link for OTM and GTM Documentation Library Release 6.3. Click the Documentation tab. Note the list of available documents for the selected OTM release. In the top part of the page, the document names contain links to access the corresponding document. The section “Confidential Documents” lists the confidential documents and does not contain links. You can access these documents via the My Oracle Support note or the installer. The confidential documents include the following: • Security Guide • Data Dictionary • Data Dictionary ReadMe • Structural Changes Guide • External Programming Interface Guide • OAM Integration Guide • XML Interface Changes • XML Schema There are also documents for FTI and GTM Close the Oracle Transportation Management 6.3 Documentation Library page.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no 14. 15.

K

16.

Viewing the Transfer of Information Sessions (TOIs) Transfer of Information (TOI) sessions provide information on how to set up and use different features within OTM. TOIs are narrated slide presentations. There are two types: deltas and comprehensives. • Delta: These are version specific. They cover enhancements that were added to a specific release. Often they specify what is new or different from the previous version, including benefits of new features from a business perspective and details on product dependencies. They are usually released within a few months of a release. These are not updated once they are released. • Comprehensive: These are not version specific. They are scenario-based and cover an area of OTM. They usually cover setup and transaction. Depending on the length, Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 2 - Viewing Additional OTM Resources Chapter 1 - Page 19

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

there can be multiple parts which are designed to be taken in sequence. These are updated periodically. TOIs exist for OTM 5.5 GA, 5.5 CU2, 5.5 CU3, 5.5 CU4, 5.5 CU5, 6.0 GA, 6.1, 6.2 and 6.3. Even though 5.5 TOIs may seem old, there is still value in them for features that have not changed much since. If you have an Oracle Support contract for OTM, then you already have access to view the OTM TOIs. To view a list of OTM TOIs, complete the following: 17. In the My Oracle Support note, follow the link and directions to access the TOIs.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 2 - Viewing Additional OTM Resources Chapter 1 - Page 20

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 2 - Viewing Additional OTM Resources Chapter 1 - Page 21

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Lesson 4: Adding and Retrieving OTM Data

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 4: Adding and Retrieving OTM Data Chapter 1 - Page 22

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Guided Demonstration 1 - Searching in OTM Searching When you click on a menu option, in most instances you are automatically taken to a search page where you can enter criteria to run a query for an existing business object or create a new business object, such as locations, orders, rates, or service providers. For example, when you click on the Buy Shipments menu option, OTM displays a search page. 1. Click Shipment Management > Shipment Management > Buy Shipments. OTM displays the buy shipment search page. Each tab has text fields on which you can query. Certain fields have f, l, v, and n buttons to their right. For these fields, you can: • f (find) – Displays a search page for a certain object. • l (list) – Displays a list of all records for a certain object. Also, if you enter some characters in the field and click l, OTM displays all records beginning with those characters. • v (view) – Displays the view page for the record you have typed into the text field. • n (new) – Allows you to create a new object, if you have the authorization to do so. Conditional operators, such as begins with, ends with, not null, etc. let you further define the criteria entered in that field. The following links are available at the bottom of the search page: • Search – Allows you to search for all records meeting the defined criteria. • New – Creates a new object, such as location, etc. • Sort order – Allows you to specify the order in which the results of your search will display. • Actions – Allow you to perform certain actions against the business object. • Export – Allows you to export the query results to a spreadsheet. 2. Enter a Destination Location ID of SAN. When you type the first three characters of an ID, you see a listing of all possible location IDs that begin with those characters. This feature, called auto-complete, is enabled by a global property called glog.ui.autocomplete. 3. Select SAN DIEGO STORE. 4. Click Search at the bottom of the page. Once you query on a location, OTM displays the results page listing all the records that meet the search criteria specified on the query page. Unless you specify a domain in your query, the results include all data to which you have read and write access. At the top of the results page, you see the following links: − New – Allows you to create a new shipment. − View – Displays the selected record(s) in a view-only format. − Edit – Displays the original data entry fields available for editing. Certain fields cannot be edited (for example Shipment ID). You can only edit a record if you have the appropriate access. − Delete – Deletes the record. − Actions – Allow you to perform certain actions against the business object. To the right of the Actions button, you see a drop-down list containing the following:

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Searching in OTM Chapter 1 - Page 23

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

5. 6. 7.

− Replace Current Window – When selected, OTM overwrites the current window. − Always Open in New Window – When selected, OTM always opens in new window. − Always Open in Same Window – This option assumes there is one other window that will always be the target window. If that window is currently open, upon selection, OTM replaces the content of that window with what you click. If the target window is not open, OTM opens a window with the new content. At the bottom of the results list, you see the following links: − New Query – Displays a blank search page so you can perform a different query if the records that resulted from the original query are not what you want. − Refine Query – Displays the search page with your original query field values that you can change to refine the search. − Export – Displays the selected records in a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet. Click Shipment Management > Shipment Management > Buy Shipments. Click Search at the bottom of the page. Select any two check boxes. Note how OTM displays the number of selected records to the right of Selected. Select another check box. Note how OTM increases the number of Selected Page and Total to 3. Scroll to the far right in the results page. Note how OTM always displays the ID column. Scroll back to the far left of the results page. Click the Shipment ID heading once to sort the column in ascending order. Click the Shipment ID heading a second time to sort the column in descending order. To resize the Shipment ID column, move your mouse pointer over the far right-side of the column heading. When you see a || arrow similar to the one shown here, hold down the left-mouse button and drag the arrow to the right. When you release the mouse button, the column resizes.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c 8. a or Guid @ t ut dent 9. m i th Stu n a 10. ulik e this h ฺ 11. ik o us h t r a se t 12. k ( tt cen 13. u m li i h e t l an erab 14. k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Searching in OTM Chapter 1 - Page 24

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Guided Demonstration 2 - Adding and Editing Records Tips for Adding/Editing OTM Data Throughout this course, you will be adding new data to OTM and editing existing data in OTM. When creating new records in OTM, the following should be taken into account: • When adding a record, the ID of the record should not contain special characters such as periods, commas, or ampersands. Underscores can be used. • You must go in order when completing the record and cannot skip from one tab to the next and then back again. If you forget to input information on a previous tab, complete the record entirely, click Finished, and then return and edit the record to add the additional information. • Never use the browser back button when creating a new record. Data may be lost. If there is a breadcrumb trail in the top right, you can click a link there to go back to a previous page. • When adding a record, always click Finished when the record is complete to save the data. Otherwise data is lost. • Required fields are denoted by a red *. Conditional fields are denoted by a blue * and are only required if other data is present. • Some data entry grids offer the ability to have multiple entries and require you to click a Save button after each entry. Note the Save buttons do not save anything to the OTM database. You need to click Finished to save to the database. • Make sure you only click the Finished button once, as OTM will attempt to save multiple records if Finished is clicked more than once.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t Adding a Record k ( n Manager. tt >cLocation e u 1. Click Shipment Management i m l hiLocations t OTM displaysnthe leFinder page. b a a 2. Click New likat thesbottom er of the page. f u H anthe Identification tab. kOTM displays r i t h t ar3. Enter nona Location ID of DALLAS LOCATION. 4.

Enter a Corporation ID of OUTLETS OF USA (already created). Note how OTM suggests this value after you enter only a few characters. 5. Select OUTLETS OF USA from the auto-complete list. 6. Click v (view) to the right of the OUTLETS OF USA Corporation ID. When you click the v button, the Corporation page is displayed so you can view the details of OUTLETS OF USA. 7. Close the Corporation page. 8. Enter a Country Code of USA. Note the Country Code. The country code has a red * (asterisk) in front of it which means that it is required. You will not be able to save the location if you do not have a country code specified. 9. Click Roles at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Roles tab. 10. Click New Location Role Profile. The Role page opens. 11. Select a Location Role of BILL TO. Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 2 - Adding and Editing Records Chapter 1 - Page 25

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

12. Click Save at the bottom of the page. OTM returns to the Roles tab. Remember to always click Finished to save your new record. Note the Save buttons do not save anything to the database. Editing a Record 13. Click Shipment Management > Location Manager. 14. Enter a Location ID of DALLAS. 15. Click Search at the bottom of the page. 16. Click the ID. OTM displays the Identification tab. You can edit the information except in those fields that are grayed out. You cannot edit the Location ID. If you need to change it, copy the existing location, enter the desired Location ID, and delete the original location record. 17. Click the Help link on the top menu bar. The OTM online help is context sensitive. The OTM online help page displays information about the Location Manager: Identification tab. 18. Close the OTM online help. 19. Click the Roles tab. OTM displays the Roles tab. 20. Click New Location Role Profile. 21. Select a Location Role of SHIPFROM/SHIPTO. 22. Click Save at the bottom of the page. OTM returns to the Roles tab. 23. At the top of the page, click Finished to save the record. OTM displays the confirmation page.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H Using SmartLinks ikhas shortcuts tra to view additional information about business objects. These shortcuts are h t OTM n r a no called SmartLinks. 24. Click Shipment Management > Shipment Management > Buy Shipments. OTM displays the buy shipment search page. 25. Click Search at the bottom of the page. 26. Right-click on a row in the Buy Shipments results page. A SmartLink is an OTM menu listing shortcuts to related information for that business object. In this example, you can see the available SmartLinks for buy shipments. The Edit, Export, and View options appear on all SmartLink menus. 27. Close the SmartLinks menu. Using Actions Actions allow you to perform certain functions against a business object. 28. Select the check box to the left of a shipment. 29. Click Actions at the top of the results page. 30. Click the plus sign (+) next to Shipment Management. Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 2 - Adding and Editing Records Chapter 1 - Page 26

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

31. Click the plus sign (+) next to Tender. You will use some of these options in the practices throughout the class. 32. Close the Actions menu.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 2 - Adding and Editing Records Chapter 1 - Page 27

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Guided Demonstration 3 - Creating and Running Saved Queries Creating and Running a Saved Query You can create saved queries for searches that you use frequently. 1. Click Shipment Management > Location Manager. 2. Enter a Domain Name of PUBLIC. 3. Click the Address tab. 4. In the City field, enter LONDON. You may also enter other information such as postal code or a specific sort order. 5. Click the Role tab. 6. Select a Location Role of AIRPORT. 7. Click Save on the right side of the page near the bottom. OTM displays the Finder – Save Query page. 8. Enter a Query Name of LONDON AIRPORTS. 9. Click OK. OTM displays your query in the saved query list along with any other saved queries. 10. Click Execute Query to the right of your saved query. OTM displays the locations found by the search criteria you specified.

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

s ) ha

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 3 - Creating and Running Saved Queries Chapter 1 - Page 28

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Practice 1 - Querying for Records Querying for Records 1. Click Shipment Management > Location Manager. OTM displays the Locations Finder page. 2. At the top of the page, click the Address tab. OTM displays the address tab. 3. In the City field, enter LONDON. 4. From the drop-down list next to City, select the conditional operator of Contains. 5. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Locations results page with all locations that have a city name containing LONDON. 6. At the top of the results page, click the Location Name header. OTM sorts your results by the location name in ascending alphabetical order. 7. Click the Location Name header a second time. OTM sorts your results by the Location Name in descending alphabetical order. 8. In the ID column, click the LGW ID. OTM displays the details for location LGW. Based on your user access rights, you are only able to view this information. 9. Scroll down and click the plus sign next to the Location Role of AIRPORT. Notice that the Location Role section is expanded. 10. Scroll up and click the minus sign next to Address. Notice that the Address section is now hidden. 11. To view the section again, click the plus sign next to Address. You can use this feature anywhere you see a plus or minus sign in front of a section header.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Querying for Records Chapter 1 - Page 29

a

Solution – Querying for Records

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

You successfully queried for records in OTM.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Querying for Records Chapter 1 - Page 30

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Practice 2 - Adding and Editing Records Adding a Record 1. Click Shipment Management > Location Manager. OTM displays the Locations Finder page. 2. At the bottom of the page, click New. OTM displays the Location – Identification tab. 3. Enter a Location ID of DALLAS LOCATION. 4. Enter a Location Name of DALLAS LOCATION. 5. Enter a Corporation ID of OUTLETS OF USA (already created). In this example, the Corporation ID already exists but you can also create a new corporation. 6. Enter a City of DALLAS. 7. Enter a Province Code of TX. 8. Enter a Postal Code of 75200. 9. Enter a Country Code of USA. 10. Click Roles at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Roles tab. 11. Click New Location Role Profile. 12. Select a Location Role of SHIPFROM/SHIPTO. 13. Click Save at the bottom of the page. OTM returns to the Roles tab. 14. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM displays a confirmation page where you can view the location you just created, edit the location you just created, view a log file, create a new location, modify an existing location, or perform an action against your new location.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik a nRecord Editing tra h t r a 15. From no the confirmation page, click Edit.

K

16.

17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23.

OTM displays the Location – Identification tab. You can edit the information except for those fields that are grayed out. On the top menu bar, click the Help link. The OTM online help is context sensitive. The OTM online help page displays information about the Location Manager: Identification tab. Close the OTM online help. Click v (view) to the right of the Corporation ID of OUTLETS OF USA. When you click v (view), OTM displays the details of the corporation. Close the Corporation page. Click the Roles tab. OTM displays the Roles tab. Click New Location Role Profile. Select a Location Role of BILL TO. Click Save at the bottom of the page. Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 2 - Adding and Editing Records Chapter 1 - Page 31

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

OTM returns to the Roles tab. Notice you now have two location roles defined for this location, BILL TO and SHIPFROM/SHIPTO. 24. You only want this location to be a BILL TO location. Click the trash can icon to the far right of the location role SHIPFROM/SHIPTO. 25. Click OK to confirm that you want to delete this location role profile. OTM returns to the Roles tab with BILL TO as the only defined location role. 26. Click Finished, at the top of the page, to save the record. OTM displays the confirmation page.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 2 - Adding and Editing Records Chapter 1 - Page 32

a

Solution – Adding and Editing Records

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Adding a Record You successfully added a record in OTM. Editing a Record You successfully edited a record in OTM.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Adding and Editing Records Chapter 1 - Page 33

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Practice 3 - Creating Saved Queries Creating a Saved Query 1. Click Shipment Management > Location Manager. OTM displays the Locations Finder page. 2. Enter a Domain Name of PUBLIC. 3. Click the Address tab. OTM displays the Address search tab. 4. In the City field, enter LONDON. 5. Click the Role tab. OTM displays the role search tab. 6. Select a Location Role of AIRPORT. 7. Click Save at the bottom right of the page. OTM displays the Save Query page. 8. Enter a Query Name of AIRPORTS. 9. Click OK. OTM returns to the Locations Finder page. Your new query now appears in the Saved Query drop-down list at the bottom of the page. 10. Click Execute Query at the bottom right of the page. OTM displays the Locations results page containing a list of locations based on the query you just defined.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 3 - Creating Saved Queries Chapter 1 - Page 34

a

Solution – Creating Saved Queries

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Creating a Saved Query You successfully created a saved query in OTM.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Creating Saved Queries Chapter 1 - Page 35

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Lesson 5: Setting OTM Preferences

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 5: Setting OTM Preferences Chapter 1 - Page 36

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating and Viewing Business Monitors Creating Saved Queries To set up a Business Monitor, you first need to define the saved queries you wish to include in the Business Monitor. 1. Click Order Management > Order Release > Order Release. 2. Click the Saved Query ID drop-down list to see all order release saved queries. If you do not see the queries you need, you can create them. Your Business Monitor can include saved queries from different business objects. Viewing a Business Monitor Assign these queries to your Business Monitor ID. 3. Click Configuration and Administration > Preferences > Manage Business Monitors. 4. Enter a Business Monitor ID of CORECOMPETENCE. 5. Click Search at the bottom of the page. 6. Click the ID. • Note Refresh Interval (minutes). You can define a refresh interval that controls how often the active Business Monitor refreshes the values in the Number of Matching and the Number of Previously Matching columns. • Note the Sequence Number. The sequence number defines in what order OTM displays the results of these queries in the Business Monitor. • Note the Query ID. The query ID represents the business object that you want to monitor. • Note the Saved Query ID. The saved query ID gets executed when you launch the Business Monitor or when the refresh interval expires. Make sure you choose a saved query that was created for the business object that you selected in the query ID field. • Note the Screen Set ID. The screen set ID controls the display attributes of the results page that appears when you click any of the results in the Business Monitor. • You then assign the Business Monitor to a user preference.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Assigning User Preference To activate your user preference, assign the user preference to a specific user. 7. Click Configuration and Administration > User Configuration > Manage User Access. 8. Select a User Access Type of User Preference. 9. Enter a User ID of ADMIN. 10. Click Edit User Access at the bottom of the page. 11. Ensure that the Replace Existing User Preference With The Following check box is selected. 12. Enter a User Preference of COREDEMO. 13. Click Finished at the top of the page. 14. Log out of and back into OTM. Viewing the Business Monitor You can then see your important saved queries in one place. 15. Click the Business Monitor link at the top of the page. Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating and Viewing Business Monitors Chapter 1 - Page 37

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

OTM displays the Business Monitor page containing your defined saved queries. You can quickly see the number of: • Order bases which are not available for planning (ORDER BASE – NO RELEASES) • Orders which are ready to be planned into shipments (ORDER RELEASE-NEW) • New shipments (SHIPMENT-NEW) • Shipments with delayed events entered against them (SHIPMENT-DELAYED) 16. Click on any number in the Number of Matching column. OTM displays the records matching your query in the Business Monitor. 17. Close the results page.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating and Viewing Business Monitors Chapter 1 - Page 38

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Practice 1 - Copying and Editing User Preferences Copying and Editing a User Preference 1. Click Configuration and Administration > Preferences > User Preferences. 2. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the user preferences results page. 3. Select the check box next to CORECOMPETENCE. 4. Click Copy User Preference. OTM displays the User Preferences page. 5. Enter a User Preference ID of STUDENT. 6. In the Preference section, select a Name of Business Monitor. 7. Select a Value of CORECOMPETENCE. 8. Click Save to the right of the Value field. 9. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM displays the confirmation page. 10. Close the confirmation page.

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

s ) ha

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Copying and Editing User Preferences Chapter 1 - Page 39

a

Solution – Copying and Editing User Preferences

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

You successfully copied a user preference with an ID of STUDENT and added a Business Monitor of CORECOMPETENCE to it.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Copying and Editing User Preferences Chapter 1 - Page 40

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Practice 2 - Assigning User Preferences Assigning a User Preference 1. Click Configuration and Administration > User Configuration > Manage User Access. OTM displays the Manage User Access page. 2. Select a User Access Type of User Preference. 3. Enter a User ID of ADMIN. 4. Click Edit User Access at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the User Preference Access tab. 5. Remove the User Preference entry of CORECOMPETENCE. 6. Type STU and select STUDENT from the resulting auto-complete list. 7. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM displays the confirmation page. 8. Log out of OTM. To have the Business Monitor display, you must log out of OTM and log back in again. 9. Log in to OTM. 10. Click the Business Monitor link at the top of the page. OTM displays the Business Monitor page containing your defined saved queries. Enter the defined Business Monitor saved queries below. You can compare these results to what you will see in the Business Monitor later in this class.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a lik Value thisin Number of Matching Field… Saved Query Name ฺhu e ik o us h t r ORDER_BASE-NO_RELEASES a se t k ( tt cen ORDER_RELEASE-NEW u m li i h e SHIPMENT-NEW t l an erab k i l SHIPMENT-DELAYED u nsf H ik n-tra h t r no the Business Monitor. Ka 11. Close

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 2 - Assigning User Preferences Chapter 1 - Page 41

a

Solution – Assigning User Preferences You successfully assigned a new user preference of STUDENT to your OTM user.

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Assigning a User Preference Saved Query Name

Value in Number of Matching Field…

ORDER_BASE-NO_RELEASES

1 (Note: This is an order base in the SHAREDCORE domain that will be used for a demonstration later in the class.)

ORDER_RELEASE-NEW

0

SHIPMENT-NEW

0

SHIPMENT-DELAYED

0

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

s ) ha

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Assigning User Preferences Chapter 1 - Page 42

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Lesson 6: Customizing OTM

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 6: Customizing OTM Chapter 1 - Page 43

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Custom Manager Layouts, Screen Sets and Menus The instructor’s domain has customized copies of the screen sets, manager layouts and menus. This allows the instructor to demonstrate this feature. In this demo, we’ll customize a Freight Forwarding manager, in edit mode, and also view a customized screen set (finder results page). Then we’ll see how these are added to a custom menu and the menu assigned to a user. Viewing Custom Manager Layouts You can use the Manager Layout Detail page to customize the manager layout on which you're working. The manager you selected to customize is populated with the values from the original manager layout you copied. 1. Click Configuration and Administration > User Configuration > Manager Layout. 2. Enter a Domain Name of COREDEMO. 3. Click Search. 4. Click FREIGHT_FORWARDING_EDIT. OTM displays the Manager Layout page for the custom manager layout. 5. Click the Detail tab. • Note the tabs across the page. These correspond to the tabs on the Freight Forwarding manager. 6. Select the option button next to the INCO Terms field. OTM displays icons. With these icons, you can: • Delete this field by clicking the trash can icon. • Edit the field by clicking the pencil icon. 7. Click the pencil icon to edit the field. You can now do the following: • Hide the field by clearing the Show check box. • Make it a required field. • Make it read only. • Different types of fields will have different options available for edits. 8. Click the Save button. OTM displays the Detail tab. In this demonstration, we are going to delete all four INCO Term fields. 9. With the INCO Terms field option button selected, click the trash can icon. 10. Click OK when you see the question “Are you sure you want to delete this field?”. OTM refreshes the Manager Layout page and the INCO Terms field is removed. It is replaced by an Add INCO Terms button. • If you wanted to add the field back, you would click the Add INCO Terms button. 11. Select the option button next to INCO Term Location. 12. Click the trash can icon. 13. Click OK when you see the question “Are you sure you want to delete this field?”. OTM refreshes the Manager Layout page and the INCO Term Location field is removed. 14. Select the option button next to Final INCO Terms.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Custom Manager Layouts, Screen Sets and Menus Chapter 1 - Page 44

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

15. Click the trash can icon. 16. Click OK when you see the question “Are you sure you want to delete this field?”. OTM refreshes the Manager Layout page and the Final INCO Terms field is removed. 17. Select the option button next to Final INCO Term Location. 18. Click the trash can icon. 19. Click OK when you see the question “Are you sure you want to delete this field?”. OTM refreshes the Manager Layout page and the Final INCO Term Location field is removed. 20. Click Finished. We’ll see the results of deleting these fields of this later in this lesson. Viewing Custom Screen Set Managers A screen set defines how the search and search results pages look, similar to the way that a manager layout configures the create/edit/view pages of a manager. 21. Click Configuration and Administration > User Configuration > Screen Set Manager. 22. Enter a Domain Name of COREDEMO. 23. Click Search. 24. Click FREIGHT_FORWARDING_EDIT. OTM displays the Screen Set manager. 25. Click the Search tab. Use this page to configure the fields that you want to appear on the Search page. You can also rearrange the sequence of the tabs and their associated fields and you can add new tabs and fields. You can also delete a tab or field. 26. Click the Results tab. Use this page to configure the columns that appear on the Results page of the business object assigned to this screen set. 27. In the Total Gross Weight row, click More. 28. Notice the Total check box is selected. The Total check box determines if the column is to be totaled. The Total check box is also selected for the Total Gross Volume, Total Net Weight and Total Net Volume rows. 29. Click Save. OTM displays the Screen Set manager again. 30. Click the Actions tab. Use this page to configure the actions that are available for a business object. OTM is preconfigured to display all available actions for business objects. However, you may want to prevent a user from performing a specific action. You can also move actions to new positions in the hierarchy. 31. Click the SmartLinks tab. Use this page to configure the SmartLinks that are available for a business object. OTM is pre-configured to display all available SmartLinks for business objects. However, you may want to prevent a user from viewing a specific SmartLink. You can also move SmartLinks to new positions in the hierarchy. 32. Click Finished. We’ll see what this looks like later in this class.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Custom Manager Layouts, Screen Sets and Menus Chapter 1 - Page 45

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Viewing a Customized Menu The Menu Editor lets you control the objects that appear on the navigation menu on the left side of the OTM home page. After you create a menu, you can assign it to a domain, user, or level using the Access Manager. Also, note that you can assign more than one menu. 33. Click Configuration and Administration > User Configuration > Menu Manager. 34. Enter a Domain Name of COREDEMO. 35. Click Search. OTM displays the results page. 36. Click CORE MENU. The custom menu opens. Note: It may take a while for this page to load. So please allow time for the page to open completely. 37. Click Purchase Order. Note the icons that appear. You can move this item up or down, delete it or add to it. 38. Scroll down to the bottom of the menu. At the bottom, you will see the folder Demo Screen Set and under that Freight Forwarding. 39. Click Finished.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i Assigning Custom Menus to Users th Stu n a New user menus are not available by default. Access must ik thbeisgranted to make them active. l u 40. Click Configuration and Administration Configuration > Manage User Access. ฺh> User e k s i u h 41. Select a User Access Type of User rt Menu. to a k e ( 42. Enter a User ID of ADMIN. tt cens u 43. Click Edit User Access. im le li h t OTM displays anthe User abMenu Access page. r k i l e f • Note u thatnthes CORE MENU is selected. H k i Ifh you made -any trachanges to the CORE MENU, you must log out and back into OTM to see the t n r nomenu. Ka updated

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Custom Manager Layouts, Screen Sets and Menus Chapter 1 - Page 46

a

Guided Demonstration 2 - Viewing Results of Customization

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

The instructor’s domain has customized copies of the screen sets, manager layouts and menus for freight forwarding. This allows the instructor to demonstrate this feature. Viewing Custom Menus First, let’s view the customized menu. 1. Scroll down to near the bottom of the main menu. 2. Click Demo Screen Set. The OTM menu displays the Demo Screen Set and Freight Forwarding menu option under the new group of Demo Screen Set. Let’s look at the results of our customization. Viewing Custom Manager Layout Next, let’s view customized manager layout for freight forwarding. 3. Scroll down to near the bottom of the main menu. 4. Click Demo Screen Set > Freight Forwarding. 5. Click Search. 6. Select the check box next to DEMO2. 7. Click Edit. Note that there are no INCO terms fields. Normally they appear in the top section above Order Configuration. View the standard (non-customized) Freight Forwarding page to see the INCO Terms fields. 8. Click Brokerage and Forwarding > Booking > Freight Forwarding. 9. Click Search. 10. Select the check box next to DEMO2. 11. Click Edit. Note that on this non-customized manager, you see the INCO Terms fields.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r Viewing a nothe Results Page

Next, let’s review the customized results page (screen set). 12. Click Demo Screen Set > Freight Forwarding. 13. Enter an Order Release ID of DEMO. 14. Click Search at the bottom of the page. 15. Scroll to the right until you see the columns Total Gross Weight, Total Gross Volume, Total Net Weight, and Total Net Volume. 16. Select one or more Freight Forwarding IDs. Note the Total row at the bottom of the results page and how the values in it change as you select more records. OTM only displays totals for columns which have been configured to do so. Reconfiguring the Results Page To be able to edit and save changes to results pages, you must have write access to your screen sets and manager layouts. 17. Click on the wrench icon above the table to open the Configure Results page. Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 2 - Viewing Results of Customization Chapter 1 - Page 47

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l anDirectly ainbthe Results Page r Editing Records k i l e f s on the results page if you have defined them to be editable in the screen Hube modified Fields can n a k r i t set. arth non-

18. Under Selected, click Order Release ID. 19. Click the Move Left arrow. 20. Click Save. Notice that the Order Release ID column no longer appears on the results page. 21. Click the wrench icon to view the Configure Results page again. 22. Under Selected, scroll down to locate and select Status. 23. Click the Move to Up arrow to move Status to the top of the column. 24. Click Save. Note that the Status column is now the first column in the results page and you do not need to scroll to see it.

K

25. Double-click in the Late Pickup Date column for the DEMO2 Order Release ID. OTM displays a Late Pickup Date pop-up window. Note that the screen set must be configured to allow editing of certain columns on the results page.

26. Enter a Late Pickup Date of next Monday. 27. Click OK. The new Late Pickup Date appears in the results page highlighted in blue.

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 2 - Viewing Results of Customization Chapter 1 - Page 48

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

28. Click the Save All Changes icon above the results page to save the newly entered value to the database. OTM displays the Saving… page. 29. Click Close. The other options in the inline edit toolbar are: • Undo All Changes - To undo all changes made to the results page since the last save. • Mass Update - To save many changes at once. • Configure Results – Explained above. • Save Configuration – To save changes to the configuration of the results page. • Print – To print the results page without exporting. • Search Criteria – Shows the search criteria used to return the results that were returned. Search criteria only displays if you have entered some criteria before initiating the search.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 2 - Viewing Results of Customization Chapter 1 - Page 49

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Guided Demonstration 3 - Working with Advanced Layouts. Advanced layouts enable you view data from several areas of the system on one page. For example, you can view order releases and shipments along with a map. Advanced layouts can be divided into multiple sections. Each of these sections are re-sizable. You can create your own advanced layout and configure it as you want. Optional - Viewing a Custom Advanced Layout The instructor’s domain has a customized advanced layout. This allows the instructor to demonstrate this feature. If you want to see (or show) the setup for the advanced layout, complete the following: 1. Click Configuration and Administration > User Configuration > Advanced Layout. 2. Enter a Domain Name of COREDEMO. 3. Click Search. 4. Click ORDER RELEASES AND SHIPMENTS. OTM displays the Advanced Layout page. 5. In the Layout section, click Order Release Table. The properties pane opens on the right. Note that you can define the Screen Set ID and Population Method. For Population Method, you could enter a saved query, such as order releases for a specific region. Viewing Results of a Custom Advanced Layout The instructor’s domain has a customized advanced layout added to the menu. This allows the instructor to demonstrate this feature. Custom advanced layouts need to be added to your menu to be viewed. 6. Scroll down to the bottom of the main menu. 7. Click Order Releases and Shipments. OTM displays the Core Advanced Layout page. • The map shows the routes. • Note the order releases on the bottom left and the shipments on the bottom right. The following icons appear in the toolbar in each section:

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no •

Select and Add: Allows you to find other records and then add them to the advanced layout. • Actions: Select a record in the table and then click this icon to launch the Actions menu. • Execute Default Search: Removes all the records from the table and re-runs the finder set's default saved query. • Refresh Selected: Refreshes the selected records in the table. • Remove Selected: Removes the selected records from the table. It does not remove them from the database; it only affects if they are displayed on this page. • Export: If no rows are selected in the table, then the entire table is exported to an Excel sheet. If rows are selected, you can choose to export just those rows, or all rows. • Execute: To change the saved query that is populating the data in the related table, select one from the drop-down list then click the Execute button. Other examples of Advanced Layouts include maps and the Decision Control Center. Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 3 - Working with Advanced Layouts. Chapter 1 - Page 50

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Lesson 7: Business Scenario: Creating and Orders and Planning Shipments in OTM

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 7: Business Scenario: Creating and Orders and Planning Shipments in OTM Chapter 1 - Page 51

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Lesson 8: Managing Orders in OTM

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 8: Managing Orders in OTM Chapter 1 - Page 52

a

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Order Releases with Line Items

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

1. 2. 3.

Click Order Management > Order Release > Order Release. Enter an Order Release ID of DEMO1. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Order Releases results page. 4. Click the ID. OTM displays the Order Release tab. • Note the Order Release ID. If you leave this field blank, OTM generates an ID for you. You define the rules for this in the business number generator. 5. Enter an Early Pickup Date of today’s date. 6. Enter a Late Delivery Date of today’s date plus 3 months. • Note the Early Pickup Date and Late Delivery Date. When creating orders in OTM, it is important to add early and late pickup/delivery times for OTM to calculate your transit time. • Note the Source Location and Destination Location. Locations are required fields on the order release. 7. Click the Order Configuration of ONE_TO_ONE. OTM displays the Order Configuration manager. • An order configuration determines how ship units are created on order bases and releases and how calculations are to be performed when an order is being built. • OTM ships with several default order configurations that are located in the PUBLIC domain. These include the ones used in this class which are ONE_TO_ONE and SHIP_UNITS. You can create your own order configuration if the default ones are not sufficient for your business. Refer to the OTM online help and the OTM Order Management Guide for more details on order configuration. • Note the Order Base/Release Creation field which indicates whether the order release will be entered with lines or with ship units. In this example, Line is selected which means this order release will be entered with lines. • In addition, this order configuration specifies to automatically create one ship unit for the line item. This is specified in the Releasing Logic field. • Note the Ship Unit Creation field which indicates that OTM will automatically create the ship units from the entered line items when the order release saved. 8. Close the Order Configuration page. 9. Click the Line Item tab. • To add a new line item, you can click the New Line Item button. • Note that you can add as many line items as you need. 10. Click the pencil icon to the right of Brand Name. • Note the Packaged Item ID of BASKETBALLS and the Total Package Count of 750. When you are entering line items, the minimum data you can enter is the packaged item you are shipping and the total package count. • You can also add information such as Weight, Volume, Package Length, Package Width, and Package Height. 11. Click Save at the bottom of the page. OTM returns to the Line Item tab.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Order Releases with Line Items Chapter 1 - Page 53

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

12. Click Constraints at the bottom of the page. You can specify any constraints you want to add to your order such as a particular mode or service provider that should be used. 13. Click Involved Parties at the bottom of the page. • You can specify contacts or locations with an interest in this order. • You must enter a transport planner with an involved party qualifier ID of LOGISTICS. Otherwise, OTM cannot send tender notifications to service providers. 14. Click Finished at the top of the page. Remember that it is only when you click Finished that OTM saves your data to the database. Always look for a confirmation page when you create or update information.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Order Releases with Line Items Chapter 1 - Page 54

a

Guided Demonstration 2 - Viewing Order Releases with Ship Units

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

1.

From the confirmation page, click Modify Another. (Or navigate to Order Management > Order Release > Order Release) 2. Enter an Order Release ID of DEMO2. 3. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Order Releases results page. 4. Click the ID. OTM displays the Order Release tab. • Note the Order Release ID. If you leave this field blank, OTM generates an ID for you. You define the rules for this in the business number generator. 5. Enter an Early Pickup Date of today’s date. 6. Enter a Late Delivery Date of today’s date plus 3 months. • Note the Early Pickup Date and Late Delivery Date. When creating orders in OTM, it is important to add early and late pickup/delivery times for OTM to calculate your transit time. • Note the Source Location and Destination Location. Locations are required fields on the order release. 7. Click the Order Configuration of SHIP_UNITS. OTM displays the Order Configuration manager. • An order configuration determines how ship units are created on order bases and releases and how calculations are to be performed when an order is being built. • OTM ships with several default order configurations one of which is the SHIP_UNITS configuration used here. • Note the Order Base/Release Creation field which indicates whether the order release will be entered with lines or with ship units. In this example, Ship Unit is selected which means this order release will be entered with ship units. 8. Close the Order Configuration page. 9. Click the Ship Unit tab. OTM displays the Ship Unit tab. In this example, the order release is entered with ship unit information. 10. Click the pencil icon to the right of Drop Off Stop ID. • OTM can generate a Ship Unit ID for you. • OTM does not require any information, but you should enter as much information as possible to allow OTM to select the best service provider and rate. • A transport handling unit is the type of packaging for a ship unit. It can be a 4x4 pallet, a euro pallet, or anything else you have defined. In this example, you are shipping a count of 12 - 4X4 pallets. • You can also add information such as gross weight per ship unit, gross volume per ship unit, length per ship unit, width per ship unit, and height per ship unit. Net weight per ship unit and net volume per ship unit are also available. 11. Click Save at the bottom of the page. 12. Click Line Item at the bottom of the page. OTM creates a default line item for you. Or you can create the details for the ship unit and the line item.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 2 - Viewing Order Releases with Ship Units Chapter 1 - Page 55

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

13. Click Constraints at the bottom of the page. 14. Click Involved Parties at the bottom of the page. • You can specify contacts or locations with an interest in this order. • You must enter a transport planner with an involved party qualifier ID of LOGISTICS. Otherwise, OTM cannot send tender notifications to service providers. 15. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM displays the confirmation page.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 2 - Viewing Order Releases with Ship Units Chapter 1 - Page 56

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Practice 1 - Creating Order Releases with Line Items Creating an Order Release You are going to create an order release containing line items. 1. Click Order Management > Order Release > Order Release. 2. Click New. OTM displays the Order Release tab. 3. Enter an Order Release ID of PORTLAND-SALEM. 4. Enter an Early Pickup Date of today’s date. 5. Enter a Late Delivery Date of today’s date plus 3 months. Note: Since there are a number of date fields on the order release, make sure you populated the correct fields. 6. Select an Order Configuration of ONE_TO_ONE. 7. Enter a Source Location of PORTLAND. 8. Enter a Destination Location of SALEM. 9. Click Ship Unit at the bottom of the page. Because you selected an order configuration of ONE_TO_ONE which specifies creation of line items, OTM displays the Line Item tab. 10. Click New Line Item in the middle of the page. OTM displays the Line Item page. 11. Enter a Packaged Item ID of BASKETBALLS. 12. Enter a Total Package Count of 750. 13. Enter a Weight of 15000 LB. 14. Enter a Volume of 1750 CU FT. 15. Click Save at the bottom of the page. OTM returns to the Line Item tab of the Order Manager. 16. Click New Line Item in the middle of the page to enter a second line item. OTM displays the Line Item page. 17. Enter a Packaged Item ID of TENNIS BALLS. 18. Enter a Total Package Count of 1125. 19. Enter a Weight of 22500 LB. 20. Enter a Volume of 1000 CU FT. 21. Click Save at the bottom of the page. OTM returns to the Line Item tab of the Order Manager. 22. Click Constraints at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Constraints tab. 23. Click Involved Parties at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Involved Parties tab. 24. Enter an Involved Party Contact of PLANNER. 25. Select a Communication Method of BY CONTACT. 26. Select an Involved Party Qualifier ID of LOGISTICS. 27. Click Save to the far right of the Involved Party Contact field.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Creating Order Releases with Line Items Chapter 1 - Page 57

a

28. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM displays the confirmation page. 29. Enter the ID of the order release below:

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Field

Enter Your Results

Order ID 30. Click the Business Monitor link. Which query has been updated after performing this exercise? Saved Query Name

Number of Matching

31. Close the Business Monitor page. Creating an Order Release Enter a second order release also containing line items. 32. From the confirmation page, click Create Another. (Or navigate to Order Management > Order Release > Order Release) OTM displays the Order Release tab. 33. Enter an Order Release ID of PORTLAND-TILLAMOOK. 34. Enter an Early Pickup Date of today’s date. 35. Enter a Late Delivery Date of today’s date plus 3 months. Note: Since there are a number of date fields on the order release, make sure you populated the correct fields. 36. Select an Order Configuration of ONE_TO_ONE. 37. Enter a Source Location of PORTLAND. 38. Enter a Destination Location of TILLAMOOK. 39. Click Ship Unit at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Line Item tab. 40. Click New Line Item in the middle of the page. OTM displays the Line Item page. 41. Enter a Packaged Item ID of GOLF BALLS. 42. Enter a Total Package Count of 25000. 43. Enter a Weight of 7000 LB. 44. Enter a Volume of 700 CU FT. 45. Click Save at the bottom of the page. OTM returns to the Line Item tab. 46. Click Constraints at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Constraints tab. 47. Click Involved Parties at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Involved Parties tab. 48. Enter an Involved Party Contact of PLANNER. 49. Select a Communication Method of BY CONTACT. 50. Select an Involved Party Qualifier ID of LOGISTICS. 51. Click Save to the far right of the Involved Party Contact field.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Creating Order Releases with Line Items Chapter 1 - Page 58

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

52. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM displays the confirmation page.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Creating Order Releases with Line Items Chapter 1 - Page 59

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Solution – Creating Order Releases with Line Items Creating an Order Release You successfully created two order releases: one with an ID of PORTLAND-SALEM and a second with an ID of PORTLAND-TILLAMOOK. The business monitor displays one updated query: Saved Query Name ORDERRELEASE_NEW

Number of Matching 1

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Creating Order Releases with Line Items Chapter 1 - Page 60

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Lesson 9: Viewing OTM Statuses

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 9: Viewing OTM Statuses Chapter 1 - Page 61

a

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Order Release Statuses

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Click Order Management > Order Release > Order Release. Enter an Order Release ID of DEMO. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Order Releases results page. Mark one of the check boxes. Click View at the top of the page. OTM displays the Order Release view page. Click Status on the right side of the page near the top. OTM displays the Statuses page. Statuses tell you what has happened to this business object up until this point. This is a new order release, so all the values are set to their default. These values change as the business object moves through various processes in OTM. − Note the Status Value of PLANNING_NEW. This indicates there are no shipments built yet for this order release. − Note the Status Value of ORDER MODIFIED_NO MODIFICATION. This indicates that the order base associated with this order release is the same as when the order release was built. Certain automation agents can change this value when order bases are updated. Close the Statuses page.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu 7. n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Order Release Statuses Chapter 1 - Page 62

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Practice 1 - Viewing Order Release Statuses Viewing the Order Release Status 1. Click Order Management > Order Release > Order Release. 2. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Order Releases results page. 3. Mark the check box next to PORTLAND-SALEM. 4. Click View at the top of the page. OTM displays the Order Release view page. 5. Click Status on the right side of the page near the top. OTM displays the Statuses page. 6. Enter the Status Value for the Status Type listed below: Status Type

s ) ha

Status Value

om c ฺ le eฺ c 7. Close the Statuses page. a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no PLANNING

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Viewing Order Release Statuses Chapter 1 - Page 63

a

Solution – Viewing Order Release Statuses

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Viewing the Order Release Status For the order release: Status Type PLANNING

Status Value PLANNING_NEW

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Viewing Order Release Statuses Chapter 1 - Page 64

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Lesson 10: Planning Shipments

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 10: Planning Shipments Chapter 1 - Page 65

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Guided Demonstration 1 - Planning Multi-stop Shipments Planning a Multi-stop Shipment 1. Click Order Management > Order Release > Order Release. 2. Enter an Order Release ID of DEMO. 3. Click Search at the bottom of the page. Based on your search criteria, OTM displays two order releases. 4. Mark both check boxes. 5. Click Actions > Operational Planning > Create Buy Shipment > Multi-stop. You can select other actions such as Bulk Plan – Buy or Direct to let OTM decide how best to build shipments. You see the Build Buy Shipment confirmation page. Note the View Diagnostics button. This button is not available by default, but it can be added by selecting Diagnostic Log in the user preferences. 6. On the Build Buy Shipment confirmation page, click the View Diagnostics button. OTM displays the Diagnostics Log Viewer. • The Diagnostic Log Viewer page opens and displays process steps, entities, duration and status, so you can see the sequence of events and whether they were successful. • Two of the statuses are Success and Failure. Remember that these are process statuses and Success may not always be good nor may Failure always be bad. For example, the message may be Success for bundling orders but you may not want them bundled. • Processes vary depending on the process performed. For example, for building shipments, some of the processes you will see are: identify valid itineraries, multi-stop merge shipments, and commit shipments. • If there is a plus button, you can click on it to view sub-process steps. 7. Scroll down and note the Process Step of Multi Stop – Merge Shipments. • The status of this process steps indicates that the number of shipments to merge is 2 and that using the “Concurrent Savings Merge” algorithm that these shipments have been combined into 1 shipment. 8. Click the plus button next to Multi Stop – Merge Shipments. • Note that several new entries appear under Multi Stop – Merge Shipments. • You see the details for the Multi Stop stats process. • And finally you see the Commit Shipments process completed successfully. This indicates that the shipment was successfully saved to the database. 9. Close the Diagnostics Log Viewer page. 10. Click the Shipment ID on the Build Buy Shipment confirmation page. OTM displays the Buy Shipment view page. • OTM generates the shipment ID using rules defined in the business number generator. • Note the service provider and transport mode for the shipment. • Note the Number Of Orders and Number Of Stops. There were two orders, DEMO1 and DEMO2 planned into this single multi-stop shipment. The shipment has three stops. 11. Click the plus sign next to More. OTM displays additional shipment information including:

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Planning Multi-stop Shipments Chapter 1 - Page 66

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

•

12.

Cost information for the shipment such as Total Actual Cost, Total Weighted Cost, and Planned Cost. • Start Time and End Time for the shipment. OTM calculates the time window identifying the earliest, best, and latest start time and end time for a shipment. • Parameter Set ID used for planning the shipment. • Itinerary used to build the shipment. • Utilization bars for the weight and volume. Click the Parameter Set ID of DEFAULT. OTM displays the Parameter Set page. This is the default planning parameter set that is delivered with OTM. Parameter sets are used to control the way OTM builds and modifies shipments. They can be specified from some action pages or they can be set to default values based on either user preferences or domain settings. To set them at the domain level via domain settings, you can go to Configuration and Administration > Domain Management > Domain Settings. Close the Parameter Set page. Click the shipment ID to view the shipment again. Scroll down and click the plus sign next to the Shipment Equipment ID. OTM displays more details about the equipment used for this shipment including total weight, total volume, and ship unit data. Scroll down to the bottom of the Buy Shipment view page. OTM displays shipment stop information including all stops included in the shipment. For each stop, you can see the stop type, location, and planned arrival and departure information. Click the plus sign next to Standard Documents. This section contains standard documents associated with the shipment. A standard document is an assignment of a document type to a transaction, such as a shipment. Revisions are kept of standard documents. Refer to the OTM Transfer of Information session titled 6.3 TOI OTM Document Management Functional Overview for more information on document set up, generation, and flow. Click the plus sign next to Additional Documents. This section displays document uploads and reports directly associated with the shipment by a user or through integration. Documents can be associated with the shipment through the Attach Document or the Upload Document actions. Ad hoc documents are documents without a document type that are associated with the shipment.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a 16. ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u 17. m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no 13. 14. 15.

K

18.

Viewing Diagnostics Log Files from OTM Menus If you close the shipment confirmation page and want to go back at a later time and view a diagnostic log file, you can do this via the Process Management menus. 19. Go to Operational Planning > Process Management > Diagnostics > View Diagnostics. 20. Click f (find) next to the Diagnostic Log File ID field. OTM displays the Diagnostic Log File Finder page. 21. Enter a Start Time of today’s date. Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Planning Multi-stop Shipments Chapter 1 - Page 67

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

22. Click Search. OTM displays the Diagnostic Log File search results page. 23. Select a log file to view. In this example, there is only one file listed and it is selected by default. 24. Click Finish at the top of the page. OTM displays the View Diagnostics process management page with the ID you selected. 25. Click View Results to view the diagnostic log file. OTM displays the diagnostic log for the shipment you created earlier in this demonstration. 26. Close the Diagnostic Log Viewer page.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Planning Multi-stop Shipments Chapter 1 - Page 68

a

Guided Demonstration 2 - Mapping Multi-stop Shipments

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Mapping Your Shipment 1. From the Shipment View page, click Actions > Shipment Management > Map > Map Shipments. Click the Legend icon to view or hide the legend.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t You can zoom in and out ut dent m and maneuver the map. i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( utt licenat the bottom of the You can isee shipment information m page. thYou canaalsobselect le and run saved queries. n a ulik nsfer H ik n-tra h t r a 2. Zoom no in as necessary. 3.

4. 5. 6.

Click the Legend icon located in the right side of the icon bar. OTM displays the Legend. • For more information about the icons listed in the legend, please refer to the OTM online help topic glog.map Properties. Close the Map Shipments page. Close the Buy Shipment view page. Close the Build_Buy_Shipment page.

Viewing the Order Status 7. Click Order Management > Order Release > Order Release. 8. Enter an Order Release ID of DEMO. 9. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Order Releases results page. 10. Mark the check box next to DEMO1. 11. Click View at the top of the page. Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 2 - Mapping Multi-stop Shipments Chapter 1 - Page 69

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

OTM displays the Order Release view page. 12. Click Status on the right side of the page near the top. OTM displays the Statuses page. The status value of PLANNING_PLANNED - FINAL indicates this order release has been successfully planned onto a shipment. 13. Close the Statuses page.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 2 - Mapping Multi-stop Shipments Chapter 1 - Page 70

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Practice 1 - Planning Multi-stop Shipments Planning a Multi-stop Shipment 1. Click Order Management > Order Release > Order Release. 2. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Order Releases results page. 3. Mark the check box next to both the PORTLAND-SALEM and PORTLAND-TILLAMOOK order releases. 4. Click Actions > Operational Planning > Create Buy Shipment > Multi-stop. OTM displays the Build Buy Shipment confirmation page. 5. If you see the Ignore the Following Constraints page, make sure that nothing is selected and click OK. 6. On the Build Buy Shipment confirmation page, click the View Diagnostics button. 7. Enter the status information for the following process step:

om c ฺ le eฺ Identify Valid c a Itineraries or Guid @ t 8. Close the Diagnostic Log Viewer page. ut dent m i 9. On the Build Buy Shipment confirmation page, click the th Shipment tu ID. n S a k this OTM displays the Buy Shipment page in viewlimode. u h ฺ e 10. Click the plus sign next to More. k s i u h 11. Enter the following shipment information to art sebelow: k ( n Field utt Enter Your Results… e c i m l hIDi ble Shipment t n lika Provider era Service f u s H ID ran k i -t Actual Cost arth nonTotal

s ) ha

Process Step

Enter the Status…

K

Rate Offering Rate Record

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Planning Multi-stop Shipments Chapter 1 - Page 71

a

Solution – Planning Multi-stop Shipments

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Planning a Multi-stop Shipment You successfully viewed the diagnostics log and saw the following information: Process Step Identify Valid Itineraries

Enter Your Results… Success Found 1 Itineraries. itinerary 1: SHAREDCORE.OR MULTISTOP

You successfully created a multi-stop shipment with the following information: Field

Enter Your Results…

Shipment ID

01000

Service Provider ID

FGN9

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c Total Actual Cost 605.00 USD a or Guid @ Rate Offering ID FGN9 TL t ut dent m i Rate Record ID FGN9 OR th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Planning Multi-stop Shipments Chapter 1 - Page 72

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Practice 2 - Mapping Shipments Mapping Shipments 1. From the Shipment View page, click Actions > Shipment Management > Map > Map Shipments. 2. Zoom in as necessary. Click the Legend icon to view or hide the legend.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i You can zoom in and out th Stu n and maneuver the map. a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l n can seershipment aYou ab information at the bottom of the k page. You can also select and run saved queries. i l e f Hu rans k i t arth non3.

4. 5. 6. 7.

Click the Legend icon in the toolbar at the top of the map. OTM displays the Legend. Close the Map view page. Close the Shipment View page. Close the Build Buy Shipment confirmation page. Click Business Monitor link at the top of the page. Which query has been updated after performing this exercise? Saved Query Name

8.

Number of Matchings…

Close the Business Monitor page.

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 2 - Mapping Shipments Chapter 1 - Page 73

a

Solution – Mapping Shipments

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Mapping Shipments You successfully mapped your shipment in OTM. The business monitor displays one updated query: Saved Query Name SHIPMENT-NEW

Number of Matching 1

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Mapping Shipments Chapter 1 - Page 74

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Practice 3 - Viewing Order Statuses Viewing the Order Release Status 1. Click Order Management > Order Release > Order Release. 2. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Order Releases results page. 3. Mark the check box next to PORTLAND-TILLAMOOK. 4. Click View at the top of the page. OTM displays the Order Release view page. 5. Click Status on the right side of the page near the top. Enter the status value for the status type listed below: Status Type

Status Value

s ) ha

PLANNING

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no 6.

Close the Statuses page.

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 3 - Viewing Order Statuses Chapter 1 - Page 75

a

Solution – Viewing Order Statuses

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Viewing the Order Release Status Your status is as follows: Status Type PLANNING

Status Value PLANNING_PLANNED – FINAL

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Viewing Order Statuses Chapter 1 - Page 76

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Lesson 11: Manually Modifying Shipments

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 11: Manually Modifying Shipments Chapter 1 - Page 77

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Guided Demonstration 1 - Changing Service Providers Changing Service Provider 1. Click Shipment Management > Shipment Management > Buy Shipments. 2. Click the Order Release tab. 3. Enter an Order Release ID of DEMO1. 4. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Buy Shipments results page. 5. Mark the check box next to the ID. 6. Click Actions > Shipment Management. Note the different options under Shipment Management. You can change details such as service provider, costs, and stops. 7. Click Change Service Provider > Change Service Provider. OTM displays valid service provider options for the chosen shipment. Note the following check boxes at the top of the page: • The Allow Alternate Equipment check box allows you to change the equipment to a different valid available piece of equipment, if one is available. • Use the Allow Alternate Mode check box to change to a valid alternate transport mode. • Use the Allow Infeasible Service Time check box to allow service times to be early or late for order pickups and drop offs. There must still be a valid time window. In the Rate Preferences drop-down, you can specify whether to use preferred rates or not. We will discuss preferred rates later in this class. Note the Status. If a service provider can be used for this shipment, it has a status of Available. The service provider currently assigned to the shipment has a status of Available (Current). In the grid, you see shipment details such as rate offering, cost, start and end time for each service provider. 8. If you change any of these options, click the Refresh button to update the grid. 9. Note the Analyze Carrier Scorecard button. This button can only be used if Oracle Fusion Transportation Intelligence (FTI) is installed. FTI is not installed on the training server, so this button will not work. 10. Mark the option button next to the Service Provider ID NW99. 11. Click OK. OTM displays the shipment data for the new service provider. Note the service provider has been changed from FGN9 to NW99. 12. Click the Shipment ID. OTM displays the Buy Shipment view page. 13. Click the plus sign next to More. Note the Total Actual Cost is different from the Planned Cost. The planned cost is the original OTM calculated cost of the shipment and does not change. The total actual cost reflects the current service provider and associated rates. 14. Close the Buy Shipment view page. 15. Close the Change Service Provider page.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Changing Service Providers Chapter 1 - Page 78

a

Practice 1 - Changing Service Providers

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

You just found out that the Forest Green Trucking drivers went on strike this morning. You need to manually change the service provider on the shipment you just created. Changing the Service Provider 1. Click Shipment Management > Shipment Management > Buy Shipments. 2. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Buy Shipments results page. 3. Mark the check box next to the shipment you just created. 4. Click Actions > Shipment Management > Change Service Provider > Change Service Provider. OTM displays the Service Providers page. OTM displays all available service providers along with the shipment information if you were to select that service provider. Note that the Available service provider of FGN9 is the current service provider. 5. Mark the option button next to the Service Provider ID of NW99. 6. Click OK. OTM displays the shipment data after the service provider change. 7. Click the shipment ID to view additional shipment data. 8. Click the plus sign next to More. 9. Enter the following shipment information below:

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a is Results… thYour ulik Enter Field h ฺ e ik o us h Service Provider ID t r a se t k ( Total Actual Costtt n e u c i m l Rate Offering hi ble t n Rate likaRecord era f u s H Planned an Service k r i t h t ar nonProvider Planned Cost

Planned Rate Offering Planned Rate Record 10. Close the Buy Shipment view page. 11. Close the Change Service Provider page.

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Changing Service Providers Chapter 1 - Page 79

a

Solution – Changing Service Providers

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Changing the Service Provider Note the following data on the shipment after the service provider has been changed: Field

Enter Your Results…

Service Provider ID

NW99

Total Actual Cost

710.00 USD

Rate Offering

NW99 TL

Rate Record

NW99 OR

Planned Service Provider

FGN9

Planned Cost

605.00 USD

om c ฺ le eฺ c a Planned Rate FGN9 OR or Guid Record @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

s ) ha

Planned Rate Offering

FGN9 TL

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Changing Service Providers Chapter 1 - Page 80

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Lesson 12: Tendering Shipments

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 12: Tendering Shipments Chapter 1 - Page 81

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Guided Demonstration 1 - Tendering Shipments and Accepting Tenders Viewing the Shipment Status 1. Click Shipment Management > Shipment Management > Buy Shipments. 2. Click the Order Release tab. 3. Enter an Order Release ID of DEMO. 4. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Buy Shipments results page. 5. Mark the check box next to the ID. 6. Click View at the top of the page. OTM displays the Buy Shipment view page. 7. Click Status on the right side of the page near the top. OTM displays the Statuses page. • Note the status value of SECURE RESOURCES_NOT STARTED. This indicates the shipment has not yet been tendered. • Note the status value of REVIEWED_NOT REVIEWED. This indicates the shipment has been planned but has not been approved for execution. 8. Close the Statuses page.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a Tendering Your Shipment ulik e this h ฺ 9. From the Shipment View page, click Actions Management > Tender > s ik o >uShipment h t r Secure Resources. t a se (kaction t Using the Secure Resources ntriggers the one-step tendering process. t e u c i m l Note the Analyze Performance button. This button can only be used if Oracle i hTender t le (FTI) is installed. FTI is not installed on the training n b Fusion Transportation Intelligence a a server, ferwill not work. ulsoikthisnbutton s H 10. ik Click the tID raon the Secure Resources page. h t n r a OTM nodisplays the Shipment View page.

11. Click Status on the right side of the page near the top. OTM displays the Statuses page. Note the status value of REVIEWED_EXECUTE. This indicates the shipment is reviewed and may be executed. Also note the status value of SECURE RESOURCES_TENDERED which indicates the shipment has now been tendered to the service provider. 12. Close the Statuses page. 13. Close the Buy Shipment view page. 14. Close the Secure Resources page. Accepting Your Tender 15. From the Buy Shipment view page, click Actions > Shipment Management > Tender. • The carrier can log into OTM, in their own domain, to respond to your tender. You, as a transport planner, can also do it for them. For example, you might call them to get a quick reply and then update OTM.

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Tendering Shipments and Accepting Tenders Chapter 1 - Page 82

a

•

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

16. 17.

18. 19. 20. 21. 22.

If, for some reason, the carrier does not receive your tender notification, you can send it again with the Re-Transmit Tender action. In this example, you are accepting the tender for the service provider. Click Accept Tender. OTM displays the Accept This Shipment page. On the Accept this Shipment Page, note the following: • Note the Pickup Date Time near the bottom of the page. • You can enter reference numbers and remarks. Click Finished at the bottom of the page to accept the tender. Close the Results page. In the navigation trail at the top of the page, click the Buy Shipments Result link. OTM displays the Buy Shipments finder results. Click the ID of the shipment for which you just accepted the tender. Click Status on the right side of the page near the top. OTM displays the Statuses page. Note the status value of REVIEWED_EXECUTE which indicates the shipment is reviewed and may be executed. Also note the status value of SECURE RESOURCES_ACCEPTED which indicates the shipment has now been accepted by the service provider. Close the Statuses page.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent 23. m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Tendering Shipments and Accepting Tenders Chapter 1 - Page 83

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Guided Demonstration 2 - Sending Open Tenders Tendering Your Shipment 1. Click Shipment Management > Shipment Management > Buy Shipments. 2. Click the Order Release tab. 3. Enter an Order Release ID of DEMO. 4. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Buy Shipments results page. 5. Mark the check box next to the ID. 6. Click Actions > Shipment Management > Open Tender. You can send, modify, re-transmit, or withdraw your broadcast tender and/or spot bid tender. 7. Click Broadcast Tender. • OTM only displays service providers that support broadcast tendering and are valid for this shipment. • The default response time is the latest response time of all service providers. You can override the default using the Expected Response Time. • You can also add a Service Provider ID if one is not included in the list. • Once you click Submit, OTM sets the status value on the shipment to SECURE RESOURCES_TENDER RESPONSE OPEN.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 2 - Sending Open Tenders Chapter 1 - Page 84

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Practice 1 - Tendering Shipments Viewing Shipment Status 1. Click Shipment Management > Shipment Management > Buy Shipments. 2. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Buy Shipments results page. 3. Mark the check box next to the shipment you just created. 4. Click View at the top of the page. OTM displays the Buy Shipment page in view mode. 5. Click Status on the right side of the page near the top. OTM displays the Statuses page. 6. Enter the shipment status values for the status types listed below: Status Type

Status Value

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a 7. Close the Statuses page. or Guid @ t ut dent Tendering a Shipment m i th Management tu > Tender > Secure 8. From the Buy Shipment page, click Actions > Shipment n S a Resources. ulik e this h ฺ 9. On the Secure Resources page, clickik the shipment s ID to view additional shipment data. u h t r o t OTM displays the Buy Shipment a viewspage. k e ( t of the npage near the top. tside 10. Click Status on the right e u c i m l OTM displays the hiStatuses epage. t l n b 11. Enter theikshipment ra values for the status types listed below: l a sfestatus u H raStatus n Type Status Value k i t h t ar nonREVIEWED REVIEWED

SECURE RESOURCES

K

SECURE RESOURCES 12. Close the Statuses page. 13. Close the Buy Shipment view page. 14. Close the Secure Resources page.

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Tendering Shipments Chapter 1 - Page 85

a

Solution – Tendering Shipments

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Viewing Shipment Status Your status is as follows: Status Type

Status Value

REVIEWED

REVIEWED_NOT REVIEWED

SECURE RESOURCES

SECURE RESOURCES_NOT STARTED

Tendering a Shipment Once you tender the shipment, your status is as follows: Status Type

Status Value

REVIEWED

REVIEWED_EXECUTE

SECURE RESOURCES

SECURE RESOURCES_TENDERED

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

s ) ha

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Tendering Shipments Chapter 1 - Page 86

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Practice 2 - Accepting Tenders Accepting a Tender 1. From the Shipment View page, click Actions > Shipment Management > Tender > Accept Tender. 2. Click Finished at the bottom of the Accept This Shipment page. 3. Close the Results page. 4. In the navigation trail at the top of the shipment page, click the Buy Shipments Result link. OTM displays the Buy Shipments results page. 5. Click the shipment ID for which you just accepted the tender. 6. Click Status on the right side of the page near the top. OTM displays the Statuses page. 7. Enter the shipment status value for the status type listed below: Status Type

Status Value

om c ฺ le eฺ c SECURE a or Guid RESOURCES @ t ut dent 8. Close the Statuses page. m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

s ) ha

REVIEWED

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 2 - Accepting Tenders Chapter 1 - Page 87

a

Solution – Accepting Tenders

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Accepting a Tender Once you accept the tender for the service provider, your status is as follows: Status Type

Status Value

REVIEWED

REVIEWED_EXECUTE

SECURE RESOURCES

SECURE RESOURCES_ACCEPTED

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Accepting Tenders Chapter 1 - Page 88

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Lesson 13: Entering Shipment Tracking Events

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 13: Entering Shipment Tracking Events Chapter 1 - Page 89

a

Guided Demonstration 1 - Entering Shipment Tracking Events and Viewing Stop Times

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Responsibility: Service Provider In this demonstration, you are logging into OTM as a service provider. Entering Shipment Tracking Events 1. Login to OTM as SERVPROV.SHAREDCORE-NW99 using password CHANGEME. 2. Click Buy Shipment Events. 3. Enter a Shipment Reference Number of YOURDOMAIN. For example, COREDEMO. 4. Select a Shipment Reference Number Qualifier of GLOG. 5. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Buy Shipments results page. 6. Click the ID. If there is more than one shipment, click the ID of the shipment with the highest sequential number. OTM displays the Shipment Tracking Events page. 7. Click Add Shipment Tracking Event at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Shipment Tracking Event page. 8. Select a Responsible Party of Carrier. The Responsible Party describes the person that has entered the event. The values that appear in this field are determined by the Responsible Party Profile that is assigned to this action using the Audit Action page. By default, Oracle Transportation Management provides a Responsible Party Profile of Carrier with a Responsible Party of Carrier that is pre-configured with all available public status and reason codes. Once you select a Responsible Party, the Status and Reason fields will have specific values to choose from. 9. Select a Status of Delayed and Shipment Delayed. This indicates what has happened. 10. Select a Reason of Driver Related and Driver Related. This indicates why it has happened. 11. Note the Shipment ID is the same as the shipment ID link that you selected on the Buy Shipments page in step 6. 12. Select a Shipment Stop of 2. SALEM, OR, USA. This indicates where it has happened. 13. Enter an Event Date/Time of Today’s Date at 23:30 (11:30PM). This indicates when it has happened. 14. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM displays the Results page. 15. In the navigation trail at the top of the page, click the Buy Shipments Result link. 16. Click the ID. OTM displays the Shipment Tracking Events page. 17. Note your newly added event in the Shipment Tracking Event History section. 18. Log out of the SERVPROV domain.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Entering Shipment Tracking Events and Viewing Stop Times Chapter 1 - Page 90

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Responsibility: Transport Planner Log into your domain to see how the shipment tracking event you added impacted the shipment stop times. Viewing Updated Arrival and Departure Times 19. Log back in to OTM as YOURDOMAIN.ADMIN. For example, COREDEMO.ADMIN. 20. Click Shipment Management > Shipment Management > Buy Shipments. 21. Click the Order Release tab. 22. Enter an Order Release ID of DEMO. 23. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Buy Shipments results page. 24. Click the ID of the shipment with the highest sequential number. OTM displays the Identification tab. 25. Click the Stops tab. OTM displays the Stops tab. 26. Click Edit (the pencil icon) next to the second stop for Salem where the delayed event occurred. OTM displays the Shipment Stops page. 27. Compare the Planned Arrival Time, Estimated Arrival Time, and Actual Arrival Time fields. • Planned times always remain as originally calculated. • The actual arrival time is the time you entered on the shipment tracking event. • OTM updates downstream estimated times based on the actual arrival time but does not change upstream estimated times. In this example, the estimated departure time on stop 2 and the estimated arrival/departure times on stop 3 are updated. 28. Click Save at the bottom of the page. OTM returns to the Stops tab. 29. Click Edit (the pencil icon) next to the third stop for Tillamook. OTM displays the Shipment Stops page. 30. Compare the Planned Arrival Time, Estimated Arrival Time, Planned Departure Time, and Estimated Departure Time. Note the planned times have not changed but the estimated times have been updated based on the shipment tracking event entered on the previous stop.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Entering Shipment Tracking Events and Viewing Stop Times Chapter 1 - Page 91

a

Practice 1 - Entering Shipment Tracking Events

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

In this practice, you will act as Northwest Truck Lines and add a shipment tracking event of shipment delayed to the multi-stop TL shipment. Entering a Shipment Tracking Event 1. Ensure only one OTM window is open. 2. Log out of OTM if necessary. 3. Login to OTM as SERVPROV.SHAREDCORE-NW99 using password CHANGEME. 4. Click Buy Shipment Events. 5. Enter a Shipment Reference Number of YOURDOMAIN. For example, CORE102. 6. Select a Shipment Reference Number Qualifier of GLOG. 7. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Buy Shipments results page containing all buy shipments with a service provider of NW99. 8. Click the ID. OTM displays the Shipment Tracking Events page. 9. Click Add Shipment Tracking Event at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Shipment Tracking Event page. 10. Select a Responsible Party of Carrier. 11. Select a Status of Delayed and Shipment Delayed. 12. Select a Reason of Driver Related and Driver Related. 13. Select a Shipment Stop of 2. SALEM, OR, USA. 14. Enter an Event Date/Time of Today’s Date at 23:30 (11:30PM). 15. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM displays the Results page. 16. In the navigation trail at the top of the page, click the Buy Shipments Result link. 17. Click the ID. OTM displays the Shipment Tracking Events page. Note your newly added event in the Shipment Tracking Event History section. 18. Log out of the SERVPROV domain. 19. Log back in to OTM as YOURDOMAIN.ADMIN. For example CORE102.ADMIN. 20. Click Business Monitor link at the top of the page. Which query has been updated after performing this exercise?

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Saved Query Name

Number of Matchings

21. Close the Business Monitor page.

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Entering Shipment Tracking Events Chapter 1 - Page 92

a

Solution – Entering Shipment Tracking Events

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Entering a Shipment Tracking Event Once you enter the shipment tracking event and check your business monitor, the following saved query is updated. Saved Query Name

Number of Matchings

SHIPMENT-DELAYED

1

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Entering Shipment Tracking Events Chapter 1 - Page 93

a

Practice 2 - Viewing Stop Times on the Shipment

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

In this practice, you will act as a transport planner for BestFoods Corporation in Portland and find out how this delay affects your shipment. Viewing the Updated Arrival and Departure Times 1. Click Shipment Management > Shipment Management > Buy Shipments. 2. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Buy Shipments results page. 3. Click the ID. OTM displays the Identification tab. 4. Click the Stops tab. OTM displays the Stops tab. 5. Click Edit (the pencil icon) next to the second stop for Salem where the delayed event was entered. OTM displays the Shipment Stops page. 6. Compare the planned times, estimated times, and actual times for stop 2 (Salem).

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a Planned Arrival Time Estimated Arrival Time Actual Arrival or G uidTime @ t ut dent m i th Stu Actual Departure Planned Departure Estimated Departure n a Time Time ulikTimee this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( n ttof the cpage. e 7. Click Save at the bottom u i m l hi Stopsbltab. e OTM returns n totthe a a 8. Click Edit lik(the pencil er icon) next to the third stop for Tillamook. f u s H anthe Shipment Stops page. kOTM displays r i t h t ar9. Compare non the planned times, estimated times, and actual times for stop 3 (Tillamook). Note how the estimated times have been updated based on the event entered for stop 2 – Salem. Planned Arrival Time

Estimated Arrival Time

Actual Arrival Time

Planned Departure Time

Estimated Departure Time

Actual Departure Time

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 2 - Viewing Stop Times on the Shipment Chapter 1 - Page 94

a

Solution – Viewing Stop Times on the Shipment

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Viewing the Updated Arrival and Departure Times Your stop times are updated for stop 2 (Salem) as follows: Planned Arrival Time Same

Estimated Arrival Time Same

Planned Departure Time Same

Estimated Departure Time Date/time of actual arrival time on stop 2 plus 30 minutes activity time

Actual Arrival Time Date/time of shipment event Actual Departure Time Empty

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eTime ฺ c a Planned Arrival Time Estimated Arrival Time Actual Arrival r d i o u @ t Same Date/time of estimated Empty t G t u den departure time on stop 2 m i h plus transit timenoft 1 hourStu a 40 minutes ulik e this h ฺ ikEstimated Planned Departure Actual Departure usDeparture h t r o t Time Time Time a se k ( n tt ceDate/time Empty Same of estimated u i m l i arrival time on stop 3 plus th able n 30 minutes activity time a r k i l e f Hu rans k i t arth nonYour stop times are updated for stop 3 (Tillamook) as follows:

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Viewing Stop Times on the Shipment Chapter 1 - Page 95

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Lesson 14: Visibility for Orders and Shipments

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 14: Visibility for Orders and Shipments Chapter 1 - Page 96

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Order and Shipment Information Track and Trace Shipments Track and trace displays order or shipment information. In this example, you are going to view shipment information. 1. Click Shipment Management > Visibility > Shipment Visibility. 2. Click the Order Release tab. 3. Enter an Order Release ID of DEMO. 4. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Shipment Visibility page. 5. Right-click on the Shipment ID and select Track and Trace from the SmartLinks menu. Note the shipment Trace and Trace page displays information such as source and destination locations, service provider, planned and actual dates, equipment, and shipment event history. 6. Scroll down to the Reference Numbers section. 7. Note the reference number with a qualifier of BM for this shipment.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a Field Enter Your Results… or Guid @ t Reference Number = BM ut dent m i th Stu n Public Tracking a his their shipments in transit. ulik e tabout Public tracking enables your customers to gethinformation ฺ s ik dataoorushipment Customers can search by reference number ID. In this example, you will h t r t search for shipments using a specific reference number. (ka> Visibility se > Public Tracking. t n t 8. Click Shipment Management e u c liNumber im 9. Select a Shipment Reference Qualifier of BM. h e t l n b a erReference a 10. Enter theikShipment Number you copied above. l f u s 11. Click H Search nat the bottom of the page. a k r i t - the Public Tracking page. displays arth OTM non • •

The Public Tracking page displays scheduled arrival and departure information, reference numbers, and freight details. Note in the Freight Movement section, you can see this shipment is delayed.

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Order and Shipment Information Chapter 1 - Page 97

a

Practice 1 - Tracking and Tracing Shipments

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

In this practice, you will track and trace your shipment and view shipment tracking event information for your multi-stop TL shipment. Tracking and Tracing a Shipment 1. Click Shipment Management > Visibility > Shipment Visibility. 2. Click Search. OTM displays the Shipment Visibility results page. 3. On the shipment you just created, right-click and select Track and Trace from the SmartLinks menu. 4. Note the reference number with a qualifier of BM (i.e. bill of lading number) for this shipment. Field

Enter Your Results…

Reference Number = BM

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ s This Value… ik o uEnter h t Field r t ka nse Event Descriptiontt ( u lice m i Event Location th able n a lik Date/Time er f uEvent s H an Tracking Events page. 9. ik Close thetrShipment h t ar non

s ) ha

Viewing the Shipment Event 5. In the breadcrumb trail, click the Shipment Visibility Result link. 6. Mark the check box next to the shipment you just created. 7. Click Actions > Events > View Shipment Tracking Events. OTM displays the Shipment Tracking Events page. 8. Enter the shipment event information below.

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Tracking and Tracing Shipments Chapter 1 - Page 98

a

Solution – Tracking and Tracing Shipments

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Track and Trace a Shipment The bill of lading, or BM, reference number is as follows: Field

Enter Your Results…

Reference Number = BM

NW99-000001 (It can vary if many shipments were built before.)

Viewing the Shipment Event Your shipment tracking event information is as follows: Field

Enter This Value…

Event Description

SHIPMENT DELAYED

Event Location

2. SHAREDCORE.SALEM, OR, USA

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

s ) ha

Event Date/Time

Today’s date and a time of 23:30

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Tracking and Tracing Shipments Chapter 1 - Page 99

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Practice 2 - Viewing Public Tracking Information Viewing Public Tracking Information You will search for shipments using a specific reference number. 1. Click Shipment Management > Visibility > Public Tracking. 2. Select a Shipment Reference Number Qualifier of BM. 3. Enter the Shipment Reference Number Value you noted in the previous practice. Note: this is the reference number value with a reference number qualifier of BM. 4. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Public Tracking results page.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 2 - Viewing Public Tracking Information Chapter 1 - Page 100

a

Solution - Viewing Public Tracking Information

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Viewing Public Tracking Information You can see tracking information about your shipment.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution - Viewing Public Tracking Information Chapter 1 - Page 101

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Lesson 15: Business Scenario: Configuring OTM to Build and Tender a Multi-stop Shipment

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 15: Business Scenario: Configuring OTM to Build and Tender a Multi-stop Shipment Chapter 1 - Page 102

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Lesson 16: Creating Locations and Corporations

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 16: Creating Locations and Corporations Chapter 1 - Page 103

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Locations Creating a Location When creating a location, you should enter as much information as possible. This enables OTM to better plan your orders into shipments. 1. Click Shipment Management > Location Manager. 2. Enter a Location ID of PHOENIX DC. 3. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Locations results page. 4. Click the ID. • Note the Location ID is grayed out when editing. Once a business object is created in OTM, the ID cannot be changed. The only way to change an ID is to copy the object, enter the new ID, and delete the old object. For each domain, the ID must be unique. Your company may create a naming scheme to control IDs. • Note the Location Name. The name makes it easier to find an object if the ID is cryptic. • Note the Corporation ID. Each location must be assigned to a corporation. • Note the address information. OTM can populate the values for latitude and longitude based on known combinations of city, state/province, postal code, and country. • It is possible to have OTM verify part of your address information against data you know is correct. For example, OTM can prevent you from saving a location if the postal code, city, and country are an unknown combination. 5. Click the Roles tab. • Location roles are used to identify the function of a location. • The Roles tab allows you to enter multiple location roles for a location. Data on this tab may be used by OTM to calculate distance values and rates. 6. Click Edit (the pencil icon) to the far right of the SHIPFROM/SHIPTO Location Role. Depending on the location role selected, different fields may appear on this page. If you select a location role of XDOCK, you will see this page looks different than for a location role of SHIPFROM/SHIPTO. 7. Click the Activity Time Definition ID of FIXED STOP TIME 1H. On the Activity Time Definition page, you can set a fixed stop time and variable stop time. If you have specified both a fixed and variable stop time, OTM adds them together. • Fixed stop time identifies a set period of time. In this example, the Fixed Stop Time is 1 H (hours). • Variable stop time is in terms of time per weight, volume, ship units, etc. 8. Close the Activity Time Definition page. 9. Click Save at the bottom of the page. 10. Click the Routing tab. • Note the Location Classification. Some rates may differ between residential and commercial locations. • Note the Service Provider Profile. You can exclude certain carriers from being used for a location or enforce the use of certain carriers for this location. For example, a location has asked that a specific carrier is always used for their location.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Locations Chapter 1 - Page 104

a

•

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

•

•

Note the Equipment Group Profile. You can define use, or non-use, of certain types of equipment for this location. For example, a particular loading dock may not be able to handle 53ft equipment. Note the Substitute Location ID. You can define another location where shipments should be picked up or delivered instead of at this location. For example, for the next few weeks, you want to use an alternate location instead of picking up at the usual location. Note the Operational Locations section. When transporting goods to/from ports, airports, or rail ramps, there can be different points within them that goods are delivered to or picked up from. You can have multiple operational locations associated with a location.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Locations Chapter 1 - Page 105

a

Practice 1 - Creating Locations

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

In addition to creating a source location, you are also going to create the corporation to which the location is assigned. Creating a Source Location 1. Click Shipment Management > Location Manager. 2. Click New. OTM displays the Identification tab. 3. Enter a Location ID of PHOENIX DC. 4. Enter a Location Name of PHOENIX DC. 5. Click n (new) next to Corporation ID. OTM displays the Corporation manager. 6. Enter a Corporation ID of PHOENIX CORP. 7. Enter a Corporation Name of PHOENIX CORPORATION. 8. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM returns to the Identification tab. 9. Enter an Address Line of 123 MAIN STREET. 10. Enter a City of PHOENIX. 11. Enter a Province Code of AZ. 12. Enter a Postal Code of 85004. 13. Enter a Country Code of USA. 14. Click Roles at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Roles tab. 15. Click New Location Role Profile. OTM displays the Role page. 16. Select a Location Role of SHIPFROM/SHIPTO. 17. Enter an Activity Time Definition ID of FIXED STOP TIME 1H (already created). This activity time definition specifies a fixed stop time of 1 hour. 18. Click Save to the far right of the Activity Time Definition ID field. 19. Click Save at the bottom of the page. OTM returns to the Roles tab. 20. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM displays the confirmation page.

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

s ) ha

Create a Destination Location 21. Click Create Another. (Shipment Management > Location Manager) OTM displays the Identification tab. 22. Enter a Location ID of LOS ANGELES STORE. 23. Enter a Corporation ID of GENERAL STORE INC (already created). 24. Enter an Address Line of 2100 WILSHIRE BLVD. 25. Enter a City of LOS ANGELES. 26. Enter a Province Code of CA. 27. Enter a Postal Code of 90043. Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Creating Locations Chapter 1 - Page 106

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

28. Enter a Country Code of USA. 29. Click Roles at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Roles tab. 30. Click New Location Role Profile. OTM displays the Role page. 31. Select a Location Role of SHIPFROM/SHIPTO. 32. Enter an Activity Time Definition ID of FIXED STOP TIME 30M (already created). This activity time definition specifies a fixed stop time of 30 minutes. 33. Click Save to the far right of the Activity Time Definition ID field. 34. Click Save at the bottom of the page. OTM returns to the Roles tab. 35. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM displays the confirmation page.

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ Question Enter Your Answers… t ut dent m i What is the stop time for th Stu n SAN DIEGO STORE? a ulik e this h Who is the contact listed ฺ ik o us h for this store? t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

s ) ha

Verifying a Destination Location The location for the San Diego Store has been created for you. Search for the San Diego Store and verify the following data:

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Creating Locations Chapter 1 - Page 107

a

Solution – Creating Locations

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Creating a Source Location You successfully created a location with an ID of PHOENIX DC. Creating a Destination Location You successfully created a location with an ID of LOS ANGELES STORE. Verifying a Destination Location The data for the San Diego Store is as follows: Question

Enter Your Answers…

What is the stop time for SAN DIEGO STORE?

30 M (Click the + next to SHIP FROM/SHIP TO)

Who is the contact listed for this store?

Miranda Michaels

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

s ) ha

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Creating Locations Chapter 1 - Page 108

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Lesson 17: Creating Calendars

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 17: Creating Calendars Chapter 1 - Page 109

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Calendars Creating a Calendar 1. Click Shipment Management > Location Manager. 2. Enter a Location ID of LOS ANGELES STORE. 3. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Locations results page. 4. Click the ID. OTM displays the Identification tab. 5. Click Roles at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Roles tab. 6. Click Edit (the pencil icon) to the far right of the SHIPFROM/SHIPTO Location Role. OTM displays the Role page. 7. Click v (view) next to Calendar ID. • Cyclical calendars represent activities that occur in a cycle such as daily or weekly. For a cyclical calendar, you must specify: − Start Date – For example, if you want your weekly cycle to start on Mondays, select a date that is a Monday. − Days in Cycle – Common values are 1 for a daily calendar and 7 for a weekly calendar. • Annual calendars cover a period of time that does not repeat. For annual calendars, you must specify that you would like this calendar to be an annual calendar with noncyclical activities. • In the Activities section, note the Times and Activity. Since your Days in Cycle is 1, the detail will apply to every day in your calendar. In this example, the calendar tells OTM that receiving is performed at this location between 6AM and 9PM every day. Since this calendar is attached to a location, OTM determines that the location only receives cargo during the time window explicitly specified here. You could add an activity for the remaining hours of the day telling OTM to not perform receiving but it is not required. • Note the Override Name of CHRISTMAS. In this example, OTM prevents receiving activities during Christmas Day regardless of what is defined in the Activities section above. • Note the Activity Time Factor in both the Activities and Override grids. An activity time factor is used to alter the amount of time an appointment will take to finish at a given location. The activity time on the shipment stop is multiplied by the value you enter in the Activity Time Factor field. The resulting value is used determine the appointment slots used for making an appointment. 8. Close the Calendar page.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Calendars Chapter 1 - Page 110

a

Practice 1 - Creating Calendars

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

In this practice, you are going to add a calendar to your Los Angeles Store location. Creating a Calendar 1. Click Shipment Management > Location Manager. 2. Enter a Location ID of LOS ANGELES STORE. 3. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Locations results page. 4. Click the ID. OTM displays the Identification tab. 5. Click the Roles tab. OTM displays the Roles tab. 6. Click Edit (the pencil icon) to the far right of the SHIPFROM/SHIPTO Location Role you previously created. OTM displays the Role page. 7. Click n (new) next to Calendar ID. OTM displays the Calendar manager. 8. Enter a Calendar ID of 6AM TO 9PM. 9. Enter Calendar Notes of 6AM TO 9PM 7 DAYS. 10. Select the option button next to I would like this calendar’s cycle to be 7 days long. 11. Enter 1 into the days long text field. 12. Select a morning of date of the previous Monday. 13. Click Next at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Calendar detail page. 14. Enter a Day of 1. Since your cycle is 1, the detail will apply to every day in your calendar. 15. Select a Start Time of 6AM and :00 minutes. 16. Select an End Time of 9PM and :00 minutes. 17. Select an Activity of RECEIVE. 18. Mark the option button next to Perform. 19. Click Save to the right of the Activity Time Factor field. 20. Click Activity Calendar Overrides at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Activity Calendar Overrides page. 21. Enter an Override Name of CHRISTMAS. 22. Click the Calendar icon next to Start Date and select the upcoming December 25. 23. Select the Activity of RECEIVE. 24. Mark the option button next to Don’t Perform. 25. Click Save to the right of the Activity Time Factor field. 26. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM returns to the Role page. OTM applies your calendar to Los Angeles General Store. 27. Click Save at the bottom of the page. OTM returns to the Roles tab.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Creating Calendars Chapter 1 - Page 111

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

28. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM displays the confirmation page.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Creating Calendars Chapter 1 - Page 112

a

Solution – Creating Calendars

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Creating a Calendar You successfully created a calendar with an ID of 6AM to 9PM on your LOS ANGELES STORE location.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Creating Calendars Chapter 1 - Page 113

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Lesson 18: Creating Contacts

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 18: Creating Contacts Chapter 1 - Page 114

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Contacts Creating a Contact 1. Click Business Process Automation > Communication Management > Contacts. 2. Enter a Contact ID of PHOENIX DC PLANNER. 3. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Contacts results page. 4. Click the ID. • The Contact Manager is used to create a contact and provide specific details that relate to the contact. Some of the information specified on the Contact Manager is reflected on related documents such as invoices and bills. • Note the Language Spoken. OTM selects a tender notification template matching the language you specify. • Note the User ID. If you want the contact to use Message Center to review messages, you must specify the user ID for the contact. • Note the Location. When you create a contact through a location or service provider, OTM automatically populates the location field. • Note the Notification On check box. This check box must be marked to enable notification. 5. Click the Notification tab. • Note the Com Method ID. This indicates the preferred communication method for this contact. Options include EMAIL and MESSAGE CENTER. Depending on the communication method selected, different fields may need to be populated on the Contact tab. For example, if you specify a communication method ID of EMAIL, you must specify an Email Address on the Contact tab. • Note the Rank of 1. This field prioritizes the communication methods you specify. • Note the Calendar ID. If you leave the calendar undefined, OTM assumes your contact is available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. • Note that there is a second communication method ID of MANUAL with a rank of 2. You can enter as many communication methods as you need. • Note: OTM selects the highest-ranked communication method supported by both the service provider and planner at the time of notification.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Contacts Chapter 1 - Page 115

a

Practice 1 - Creating Contacts

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

You are going to add a new contact to an existing location. Instead of creating the contact and then assigning it to the location, you will edit the location and then create a new contact for that location. Creating a Contact 1. Click Shipment Management > Location Manager. 2. On the Location search tab, enter a Location ID of PHOENIX. 3. Click Search at the bottom of the page. 4. Click the ID. OTM displays the Identification tab. 5. Click the Communication and Remarks tab. OTM displays the Communication and Remarks tab. 6. Within the Additional Contacts section, click n (new) next to Contact ID. OTM displays the Contact Manager. 7. Enter a Contact ID of PHOENIX DC PLANNER. 8. Enter a First Name of MARK. 9. Enter a Last Name of JONES. 10. Select a Language Spoken of English. 11. Click f (find) next to User ID. OTM displays the User search page. 12. Enter a Domain Name of YOURDOMAIN (for example, CORE102). 13. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Users results page. 14. Mark the option button next to YOURDOMAIN.ADMIN. 15. Click Finish at the top of the page. OTM returns to the Contact tab. 16. Ensure that the Notification On check box is selected. It should be selected by default. 17. Click Contact Notification at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Notification tab. 18. Select a Com Method ID of MESSAGE CENTER. 19. Enter a Rank of 1. 20. Click Save to the right of the Calendar ID field. 21. Select a second Communication Method of MANUAL. 22. Enter a Rank of 2. 23. Click Save to the right of the Calendar ID field. 24. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM returns to the Communication and Remarks tab and applies your contact to the Phoenix DC. 25. Click Save to the far right of the Contact ID field. 26. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM displays the confirmation page.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Creating Contacts Chapter 1 - Page 116

a

Solution – Creating Contacts

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Creating a Contact You successfully created a contact with an ID of PHOENIX DC PLANNER. This contact is associated with your PHOENIX DC location.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Creating Contacts Chapter 1 - Page 117

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Lesson 19: Creating Commodities and Items

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 19: Creating Commodities and Items Chapter 1 - Page 118

a

Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Commodities

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Commodities are used in the shipment planning process and allow you to control things like mode compatibility, equipment compatibility (including temperature range compatibility) as well as commodity to commodity compatibility. Creating a Commodity 1. Click Order Management > Material Management > Commodity. 2. Click New at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Commodity manager. 3. Enter a Commodity ID of SHELL FISH. 4. Select the Temperature Control check box. When you select this check box, OTM only selects equipment that supports the temperature range you specify in the Temperature Control ID field. 5. Enter a Temperature Control ID of REFRIGERATED. You can define the minimum and maximum temperature this commodity must stay within. 6. Select a Mode Profile of AIR. Your commodity might require a specific transport mode to be used. For example, you want to ensure your shell fish is transported via air. Also note the following fields: • Equipment Group Profile ID allows you to specify equipment groups that are compatible or incompatible with this commodity. • Commodity Incompatibilities allows you to specify commodities that OTM should not plan with the commodity you are currently creating. For example, do not plan chemicals and food into one shipment. It is not necessary to save the page.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Commodities Chapter 1 - Page 119

a

Practice 1 - Creating Commodities

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Create two commodities: one for snack food and a second for automotive parts. Creating a Commodity 1. Click Order Management > Material Management > Commodity. 2. Click New at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Commodity manager. 3. Enter a Commodity ID of SNACK FOOD. 4. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM displays the confirmation page. Creating a Commodity 5. Click Create Another. (Order Management > Material Management > Commodity) OTM displays the Commodity manager. 6. Enter a Commodity ID of AUTOMOTIVE PARTS. 7. Enter a Commodity Incompatibilities of SNACK FOOD (from previous exercise). 8. Click Save to the right of the Commodity Incompatibilities field. 9. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM displays the confirmation page.

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

s ) ha

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Creating Commodities Chapter 1 - Page 120

a

Solution – Creating Commodities

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Creating a Commodity You successfully created a commodity with an ID of SNACK FOOD. Creating a Commodity You successfully created a commodity with an ID of AUTOMOTIVE PARTS and indicated it is incompatible with the SNACK FOOD commodity.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Creating Commodities Chapter 1 - Page 121

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Guided Demonstration 2 - Viewing Items and Packaged Items Viewing an Item 1. Click Order Management > Material Management > Item. 2. Click Search at the bottom of the page. 3. Click the Item ID of CHOCOLATE COOKIES. 4. Note the Commodity ID of SNACK FOOD. This is where you link your item with a commodity 5. Note the effective and expiration dates. You can prevent OTM from building shipments containing items outside their effective time window. 6. Note the classification standards fields such as NMFC Article ID, STCC ID, and HTS ID. You can specify different industry classifications for an item. If you cannot find the classification system you need, you can define your own using the User Defined Commodity ID and User Defined Commodity List ID fields. • Note the NMFC (National Motor Freight Classification) classification which includes class 50 to class 500 and is used for Less-than-Truckload or LTL rating. The NMFC provides both carriers and shippers with a standard by which to begin pricing negotiations and greatly simplifies the comparative evaluation of the many thousands of products moving in today's marketplace. The higher the expense or the risk of hauling the commodity, the higher the class designation. Therefore, the higher the class, the higher the corresponding per hundredweight rate. • Note the STCC (Standard Transportation Commodity Code) codes which are mostly used for rail are important to have for rating purposes. • Note the HTS (Harmonized Tariff System) codes which are an international commodity classification developed under the auspices of the Customs Cooperation Council. In the Harmonized System, goods are classified by what they are, and not according to their stage of fabrication, their use, or origin. The Harmonized System nomenclature is logically structured by economic activity or component material. • Note the SITC (Standard International Trade Classification) codes which are a standard numerical code system developed by the United Nations to classify commodities used in international trade. OTM provides a list of SITC codes that you can use or you can add your own.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Viewing the Auto-generated Packaged Item By default, when you create a new item, OTM will create a new packaged item with the exact same ID as the item. So in this example, when the item CHOCOLATE COOKIES was created, a new packaged item of CHOCOLATE COOKIES was also created by OTM. 7. Click the Packaged Item ID of CHOCOLATE COOKIES. OTM displays the Packaged Item page. 8. Note the Packaging Unit of LARGE BOX. In this example, there is a packaging unit of LARGE BOX. This is the package in which smaller boxes are being shipped. 9. Note the Package Weight of 25 LB. Note the Package Weight. Since there is a packaging unit specified OTM interprets the package weight as the weight of 10 small boxes and the tare weight of the packaging unit. 10. Note the Inner Pack Packaging Unit of SMALL BOX. Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 2 - Viewing Items and Packaged Items Chapter 1 - Page 122

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

11. Scroll down and note the Inner Pack Count of 10. Note the Inner Pack Count. This is the number of packaged items in each packaging unit. In this example, you are shipping 10 small boxes of the item in a large box 12. Close the Packaged Item page.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 2 - Viewing Items and Packaged Items Chapter 1 - Page 123

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Practice 2 - Creating Items Creating an Item 1. Click Order Management > Material Management > Item. 2. Click New at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Header tab. 3. Enter an Item ID of CHOCOLATE COOKIES. 4. Enter a Commodity ID of SNACK FOOD (from previous exercise). 5. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM automatically creates a new packaged item for the item of CHOCOLATE COOKIES with an identical ID. Editing the Packaged Item of CHOCOLATE COOKIES Next, you edit the new packaged item to add packaging information. 6. Click Order Management > Material Management > Packaged Item. 7. Enter a Packaged Item ID of CHOC. 8. Click Search at the bottom of the page. 9. Click the CHOCOLATE COOKIES link. OTM displays the Packaged Item page. 10. Select a Packaging Unit of LARGE BOX. 11. Enter a Package Weight of 25 LB. 12. Select an Inner Pack Packaging Unit of SMALL BOX. 13. Scroll down and enter an Inner Pack Count of 10. 14. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM displays the confirmation page.

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l Creating u an Item sf H n aManagement kClick Order r i 15. > Material Management > Item. t h t n o ar16. Click n New at the bottom of the page.

s ) ha

OTM displays the Header tab. 17. Enter an Item ID of CRACKERS. 18. Enter a Commodity ID of SNACK FOOD (from previous exercise). 19. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM automatically creates a new packaged item for the item of CRACKERS with an identical ID. Editing the Packaged Item CRACKERS Next, you edit the new packaged item to add packaging information. 20. Click Order Management > Material Management > Packaged Item. 21. Enter a Packaged Item ID of CRACKER. 22. Click Search at the bottom of the page. 23. Click the CRACKERS link. OTM displays the Packaged Item page. 24. Select a Packaging Unit of LARGE BOX. Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 2 - Creating Items Chapter 1 - Page 124

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

25. 26. 27. 28.

Enter a Package Weight of 20 LB. Select an Inner Pack Packaging Unit of SMALL BOX. Scroll down and enter an Inner Pack Count of 10. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM displays the confirmation page.

Creating an Item 29. Click Order Management > Material Management > Item. 30. Click New at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Header tab. 31. Enter an Item ID of MOTOR OIL. 32. Enter a Commodity ID of AUTOMOTIVE PARTS (from previous exercise). 33. Enter a NMFC Class ID of 60.0 (already created). 34. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM automatically creates a new packaged item for the item of MOTOR OIL with an identical ID.

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid Editing the Packaged Item MOTOR OIL @ t Next, you edit the new packaged item to add packaging information. ut dent m i 35. Click Order Management > Material Management t>hPackaged tuItem. n S a 36. Enter a Packaged Item ID of MOTOR. lik this u h ฺ e 37. Click Search at the bottom of the page. k s i u h 38. Click the MOTOR OIL link. art se to k ( OTM displays the Packaged n tt Itemcepage. u i m l 39. Select a Packaging Unit of LARGE BOX. i h e t l b 40. Select an Inner Unit of CAN. an Pack aPackaging r k i l e f 41. Scroll senter an Inner Pack Count of 6. Hudownraand n k i -t at the top of the page. th ClickoFinished n r42. a OTM n displays the confirmation page. K

s ) ha

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 2 - Creating Items Chapter 1 - Page 125

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Solution – Creating Items Creating an Item You successfully created an item and packaged item with IDs of CHOCOLATE COOKIES. You successfully created an item and packaged item with IDs of CRACKERS. You successfully created an item and packaged item with IDs of MOTOR OIL.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Creating Items Chapter 1 - Page 126

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Lesson 20: Creating Equipment Groups and Equipment Group Profiles

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 20: Creating Equipment Groups and Equipment Group Profiles Chapter 1 - Page 127

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Equipment Groups Creating an Equipment Group 1. Click Shipment Management > Equipment Management > Equipment Group. 2. Enter an Equipment Group ID of 48FT TRAILER. 3. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Equipment Groups results page. 4. Click the ID. 5. In the top part of the page, note the following • Note the Effective Volume, Effective Weight, Length, Width, and Height fields. OTM plans shipments using only equipment that can handle the volume, weight, and dimensions of your goods. These dimensions are used in planning and optimization calculations. 6. Scroll down until you see the Capacity in Reference Units section. • You can specify Equipment Reference Units (ERUs) to define specific capacity limits. You can define an equipment reference unit for transport handling units so regardless of how OTM optimizes, whether for weight, volume, or both, the equipment reference unit serves as a constraint to avoid overloading the equipment. • You can select multiple ERUs. Since you can have multiple ship units on an order, you can have multiple ERUs. 7. Scroll back up to the top of the page: • Note the Temperature Control ID. OTM matches the temperature constraints on your commodities with the temperature range supported by the equipment group. OTM combines commodities with equipment within the same temperature range. • The Door Height and Curve ID fields are only considered when using the load configuration functionality. 8. In the bottom half of the page, note Equipment Types section: • Equipment Types are used to define the characteristics of an equipment group. Using Intermodal Trailers as an example of an equipment group profile, the group in that profile could be 45' or 48' trailers. The equipment type against that group would be either a rollup or swing door trailer. • Equipment types are used to determine capacity information for a service provider. Capacity information can be critical in the shipment planning process. • An equipment type is not required.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Equipment Groups Chapter 1 - Page 128

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Practice 1 - Creating Equipment Groups Creating an Equipment Group 1. Click Shipment Management > Equipment Management > Equipment Group. 2. Click New at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Equipment Group page. 3. Enter an Equipment Group ID of 48FT TRAILER. 4. Enter an Effective Volume of 3576 CU FT. 5. Enter an Effective Weight of 48000 LB. 6. Enter a Length of 47.5 FT. 7. Enter a Width of 8.25 FT. 8. Enter a Height of 9.25 FT. 9. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM displays the results page.

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i Question Enter Your Answers… th Stu n a What is the effective ulik e this weight of the Equipment h ฺ ik o us Group 53FT TRAILER? h t r a se t k ( (Hint: Go to Shipment tt cen u m li Management > i h e t l Equipment Management an eGroup.) ab r k i > Equipment l f Hu rans k i t arth non-

s ) ha

Verifying Equipment Group 10. Click Modify Another. 11. Search for an Equipment Group ID of 53FT TRAILER.

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Creating Equipment Groups Chapter 1 - Page 129

a

Solution – Creating Equipment Groups

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Creating an Equipment Group You successfully created an equipment group with an ID of 48FT TRAILER. Verifying Equipment Group You successfully verified the following equipment: Question

Enter Your Answers…

What is the effective weight of the Equipment Group 53FT TRAILER?

49000.00 LB

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Creating Equipment Groups Chapter 1 - Page 130

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Guided Demonstration 2 - Creating Equipment Group Profiles Creating an Equipment Group Profile 1. Click Shipment Management > Equipment Management > Equipment Group Profile. 2. Enter an Equipment Group Profile ID of 48FT TRAILERS COMPAT. 3. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Equipment Group Profile results page. 4. Click the ID. • Note the Compatible check box. This is used to include or exclude equipment groups in the profile when computing results. − If you mark the Compatible check box, OTM must use one of the equipment groups listed in the equipment group profile. − If you leave the Compatible check box cleared, OTM cannot use any of the equipment groups listed in the equipment group profile. − When you assign the equipment group profile to other objects in OTM such as commodity, rates, itinerary, location, or order, OTM determines if it is compatible or incompatible with the object to which it is assigned using the Compatible check box. • Note the Equipment Group ID. You can enter as many equipment groups as you need.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 2 - Creating Equipment Group Profiles Chapter 1 - Page 131

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Practice 2 - Creating Equipment Group Profiles Creating an Equipment Group Profile 1. Click Shipment Management > Equipment Management > Equipment Group Profile. 2. Click New at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Equipment Group Profile page. 3. Enter an Equipment Group Profile ID of 48FT TRAILERS COMPAT. 4. Mark the Compatible check box. 5. Enter an Equipment Group ID of 48FT TRAILER (from previous exercise). 6. Click Save to the right of the Equipment Group ID field. 7. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM displays the confirmation page.

s ) ha

Creating an Equipment Group Profile 8. Click Create Another. (Shipment Management > Equipment Management > Equipment Group Profile) OTM displays the Equipment Group Profile page. 9. Enter an Equipment Group Profile ID of 53FT TRAILERS INCOMPAT. 10. Ensure the Compatible check box is not marked. 11. Enter an Equipment Group ID of 53FT TRAILER (from previous exercise). 12. Click Save to the right of the Equipment Group ID field. 13. Enter a second Equipment Group ID of 53FT DOMESTIC CONTAINER (already exists). 14. Click Save to the right of the Equipment Group ID field. 15. Enter a third Equipment Group ID of 53FT DRY VAN (already exists). 16. Click Save to the right of the Equipment Group ID field. 17. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM displays the confirmation page.

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 2 - Creating Equipment Group Profiles Chapter 1 - Page 132

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Solution – Creating Equipment Group Profiles Creating an Equipment Group Profile You successfully created an equipment group profile with an ID of 48FT TRAILERS COMPAT. You successfully created an equipment group profile with an ID of 53FT TRAILERS INCOMPAT.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Creating Equipment Group Profiles Chapter 1 - Page 133

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Practice 3 - Assigning Equipment Group Profiles Assigning an Equipment Group Profile to a Location 1. Click Shipment Management > Location Manager. 2. Enter a Location ID of LOS ANGELES STORE. 3. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Locations results page. 4. Click the ID. OTM displays the Identification tab. 5. Click the Routing tab. OTM displays the Routing tab. 6. Enter an Equipment Group Profile of 53FT TRAILERS INCOMPAT (from previous exercise). 7. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM displays the confirmation page.

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

s ) ha

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 3 - Assigning Equipment Group Profiles Chapter 1 - Page 134

a

Solution – Assigning Equipment Group Profiles

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Assigning an Equipment Group Profile to a Location You successfully assigned the equipment group profile of 53FT INCOMPAT to your LOS ANGELES STORE location.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Assigning Equipment Group Profiles Chapter 1 - Page 135

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Lesson 21: Creating Service Providers

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 21: Creating Service Providers Chapter 1 - Page 136

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Service Providers Creating a Service Provider 1. Click Contract and Rate Management > Service Provider Manager. 2. Click New at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Service Provider ID tab. 3. Enter a Service Provider/Location ID of DEMOSP. Note the service provider information looks similar to locations. 4. Enter a Corporation ID of BIG TEXAN TRUCKING (from previous exercise). • Note the SCAC field. You can specify the SCAC assigned to a service provider. A Standard Carrier Alpha Code (SCAC) identifies transportation companies. • Note the Mode Profile. The mode profile is a grouping of transport modes. Each service provider can be associated to one mode profile containing one to many transport modes. • Note the Service Provider Alias section. This provides an alternate way of identifying service providers. 5. Enter a Country Code of USA. You can specify location specific information such as address, city, state/province, and country. 6. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM automatically creates a: • Corresponding location • User ID in the SERVPROV domain

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( t n tContact e u c Adding a Service Provider i m l thi and le creates a user ID for this service provider, you can then When you click a Finished OTM n b a enter contact erfor the service provider. f ulikinformation s H 7. ik Click Edit ron anthe confirmation page. t h t n Communication and Remarks tab. ar8. Click nothe

9. Select a Communication Method of MESSAGE CENTER. 10. Click f (find) next to User ID. OTM displays the User search tab. 11. Enter a User Name of YOURDOMAIN (for example, COREDEMO). 12. Click Search at the bottom of the page. 13. Mark the option button next to SERVPROV.YOURDOMAIN-DEMOSP. This is the default naming convention OTM uses to create a user ID for service providers. 14. Click Finish at the top of the page. OTM returns to the Communication and Remarks tab. 15. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM automatically creates a primary contact for your service provider. Adding Service Provider Contact Details When you click Finished and OTM creates a primary contact for you service provider, you can then enter detailed information for the contact associated with the service provider. Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Service Providers Chapter 1 - Page 137

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

16. Click Edit on the confirmation page. 17. Click the Communication and Remarks tab. OTM only displays the details button after it has created a primary contact for you. 18. Click Details on the right side of the page near the top. OTM displays the Contact manager page in view mode. 19. Click Edit at the top of the page. OTM displays the Contact tab. 20. Click the Notification tab. 21. Click Edit (the pencil icon) to the right of the Com Method ID of MESSAGE CENTER. 22. Ensure the Rank of 1 is entered. 23. Enter a Response Time of 2 H (hours). The response time indicates the time period in which you expect the service provider to respond to a tender. 24. Enter a Calendar ID of 4AM TO 11PM. 25. Click v (view) next to Calendar ID. OTM displays the Calendar view page. • OTM uses primary contacts for tendering. During tendering, OTM looks for the calendar activity of OFFICEHOURS. • Note the Days in Cycle of 7. This indicates this is a weekly calendar. • Days 1 through 5 specify that an activity of OFFICEHOURS is performed from 4:00AM to 11:00PM. • Days 6 and 7 specify that an activity of OFFICEHOURS is not available (i.e. Don’t Perform). OTM would have implicitly interpreted the calendar this way without indicating this detail for days 6 and 7. 26. Close the Calendar view page. OTM returns to the Notification tab. 27. Click Save to the right of the Calendar ID field. 28. Click Finished at the top of the page. 29. Close the confirmation page. 30. Click Finished at the top of the Service Provider ID page.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Service Providers Chapter 1 - Page 138

a

Practice 1 - Creating Service Providers

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

To create a service provider, you first need to enter the basic data for the service provider. Creating a Truckload Service Provider 1. Click Contract and Rate Management > Service Provider Manager. 2. Click New at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Service Provider ID tab. 3. Enter a Service Provider/Location ID of BTT9. 4. Enter a Service Provider/Location Name of BIG TEXAN TRUCKING. 5. Click n (new) next to Corporation ID. 6. Enter a Corporation ID of BIG TEXAN TRUCKING. 7. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM returns to the Service Provider ID tab. 8. Select a Mode Profile of TL. 9. Enter a Country Code of USA. 10. Select a Time Zone of America/Phoenix. 11. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM displays the confirmation page.

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

s ) ha

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Creating Service Providers Chapter 1 - Page 139

a

Solution – Creating Service Providers

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Creating a Truckload Service Provider You successfully created a service provider with an ID of BTT9.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Creating Service Providers Chapter 1 - Page 140

a

Practice 2 - Adding Service Provider Contacts

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

When you click Finished and OTM creates a User ID for this service provider, you can then enter contact information for the service provider. Adding a Service Provider Contact 1. Click Edit on the confirmation page. OTM displays the Service Provider ID tab. 2. Click the Communication and Remarks tab. OTM displays the Communication and Remarks tab. 3. Select the Communication Method of MESSAGE CENTER. 4. Click on f (find) next to User ID. OTM displays the Users Finder page. 5. Enter a User Name of YOURDOMAIN (for example, CORE101). 6. Click Search at the bottom of the page. 7. Mark the option button next to SERVPROV.YOURDOMAIN-BTT9. OTM creates a user account in the SERVPROV domain for you every time you create a service provider in any domain. 8. Click Finish at the top of the page. OTM returns to the Communication and Remarks tab. 9. Click Finished at the top of the Service Provider ID page. OTM displays the confirmation page.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 2 - Adding Service Provider Contacts Chapter 1 - Page 141

a

Solution – Adding Service Provider Contacts

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Adding a Service Provider Contact You successfully added a service provider contact to your BTT9 service provider.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Adding Service Provider Contacts Chapter 1 - Page 142

a

Practice 3 - Adding Service Provider Contact Details

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

When you clicked Finished and OTM created a primary contact for your service provider, you can then enter detailed information for this contact associated with the service provider. You are also going to add a second service provider, including contact details, for ANTELOPE LINE. Adding the Service Provider Contact Details 1. Click Edit on the confirmation page. OTM displays the Service Provider ID tab. 2. Click the Communication and Remarks tab. OTM displays the Communication and Remarks tab. 3. Click Details on the right side of the page near the top. OTM displays the Contact Manager page in view mode. 4. Click Edit at the top of the page. OTM displays the Contact tab. 5. Click the Notification tab. OTM displays the Notification tab. 6. Click Edit (pencil icon) to the right of the Com Method ID of MESSAGE CENTER. 7. Enter a Response Time of 2 H (hours). 8. Enter a Calendar ID of 4AM TO 11PM. 9. Click Save next to the Calendar ID field. 10. Select a Com Method ID of MANUAL. 11. Enter a Rank of 2. 12. Enter a Response Time of 2 H (hours). 13. Enter a Calendar ID of 4AM TO 11PM. 14. Click Save next to the Calendar ID field. 15. Click Finished at the top of the page. 16. Close the confirmation page. OTM displays the Communication and Remarks tab. 17. Click Finished. Note: You may see an error message about saving or canceling you changes since changes have been made while you were editing your contact. This is normal. 18. Click the plus sign next to Show Changes. 19. Click Save Your Changes at the bottom of the message. OTM displays the confirmation page.

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

s ) ha

Creating a Service Provider You will add a second service provider, including contact details, for ANTELOPE LINE. 20. Click Contract and Rate Management > Service Provider Manager. 21. Click New at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Service Provider ID tab. 22. Enter a Service Provider/Location ID of ATL9. 23. Enter a Service Provider/Location Name of ANTELOPE LINE. Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 3 - Adding Service Provider Contact Details Chapter 1 - Page 143

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

24. Click n (new) next to Corporation ID. OTM displays the Corporation manager. 25. Enter a Corporation ID of ANTELOPE LINE INC. 26. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM returns to the Service Provider ID tab. 27. Select a Mode Profile of TL. 28. Enter a Country Code of USA. 29. Select a Time Zone of America/Phoenix. 30. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM displays the confirmation page. Adding a Service Provider Contact 31. Click Edit on the confirmation page. OTM displays the Service Provider ID tab. 32. Click the Communication and Remarks tab. OTM displays the Communication and Remarks tab. 33. Select the Communication Method of MESSAGE CENTER. 34. Click on f (find) next to User ID. OTM displays the Users search page. 35. Enter a User Name of YOURDOMAIN (for example, CORE101). 36. Click Search at the bottom of the page. 37. Mark the option button next to SERVPROV.YOURDOMAIN-ATL9. 38. Click Finish at the top of the page. OTM returns to the Communication and Remarks tab. 39. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM displays the confirmation page.

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik then-Service tra Provider Contact Details h Adding t r a no

s ) ha

40. Click Edit on the confirmation page. OTM displays the Service Provider ID tab. 41. Click the Communication and Remarks tab. OTM displays the Communication and Remarks tab. 42. Click Details on the right side of the page near the top. OTM displays the Contact manager page in view mode. 43. Click Edit at the top of the page. OTM displays the Contact tab. 44. Click the Notification tab. OTM displays the Notification tab. 45. Click Edit (pencil icon) to the right of the Com Method ID of MESSAGE CENTER. 46. Enter a Response Time of 2 H (hours). 47. Enter a Calendar ID of 4AM TO 11PM. 48. Click Save next to the Calendar ID field. 49. Click Finished at the top of the page. Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 3 - Adding Service Provider Contact Details Chapter 1 - Page 144

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

50. Close the confirmation page. OTM displays the Communication and Remarks tab. 51. Click Finished. OTM displays the confirmation page.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 3 - Adding Service Provider Contact Details Chapter 1 - Page 145

a

Solution – Adding Service Provider Contact Details

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Adding the Service Provider Contact Details You successfully added details to your service provider contact for the BTT9 service provider. Creating a Truckload Service Provider You successfully created a service provider with an ID of ATL9. You also created a service provider contact and added details for the contact.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Adding Service Provider Contact Details Chapter 1 - Page 146

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Lesson 22: Configuring Contact Notification

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 22: Configuring Contact Notification Chapter 1 - Page 147

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Guided Demonstration 1 - Configuring Contact Notification Configuring Contact Notification 1. Click Business Process Automation > Communication Management > Contact Notification. 2. Enter a Contact Notification ID of SHIPMENT TENDER – DECLINED. 3. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM ships with certain notify subject records. 4. Click the ID. OTM displays the Contact Notification manager. • You can enable contact notification by contact, contact group (if your contact is defined as a contact group), or involved party. • Note the Contact ID. One to many contacts can subscribe to this event. • Note the Communication Method of MESSAGE CENTER. You can specify a communication method or choose BY CONTACT which enables OTM to use the ranked list of communication methods in each contact. • Within the Communication Methods section, you can see the stylesheets used by each communication method. If you have a stylesheet which is customized for your company, you can specify it here. 5. Click Edit (the pencil icon) to the far right of DEMO. 6. Click v (view) next to Contact ID. OTM displays the Contact page. • Within the Contacts section, note the Group Contact ID. Multiple contacts belong to a contact group. OTM can send a notification as a broadcast to more than one contact using a contact group. In this example, there are two contacts associated with this contact group. • Within the Contact Notifications section, note the Subject. This is the event to which this contact group subscribes. Multiple events can be listed. 7. Close the Contact manager page.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Configuring Contact Notification Chapter 1 - Page 148

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Practice 1 - Configuring Contact Notification Configuring Contact Notification Set up OTM so the planner receives a message when a tender is declined. 1. Click Business Process Automation > Communication Management > Contact Notification. 2. Enter a Contact Notification ID of SHIPMENT TENDER – DECLINED. 3. Click Search at the bottom of the page. 4. Click the ID. OTM displays the Contact Notification manager. 5. Enter a Contact ID of PHOENIX DC PLANNER. 6. Select the Communication Method of MESSAGE CENTER. 7. Click Save to the far right of the Contact ID field. 8. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM displays the confirmation page.

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

s ) ha

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Configuring Contact Notification Chapter 1 - Page 149

a

Solution – Configuring Contact Notification

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Configuring Contact Notification You successfully set up contact notification for your PHOENIX DC PLANNER contact. When a shipment tender is declined, OTM will notify the planner through message center.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Configuring Contact Notification Chapter 1 - Page 150

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Lesson 23: Configuring Automation Agents

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 23: Configuring Automation Agents Chapter 1 - Page 151

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Automation Agents Creating an Automation Agent 1. Click Business Process Automation > Agents and Milestones > Automation Agent. 2. Enter an Agent ID of TENDER ACCEPTED INDICATOR. 3. Click Search at the bottom of the page. 4. Click the ID. • Note the tabs in the Agent Manager. − On the Agent Header tab, you define when the automation agent should run. − On the Actions tab, you define what the automation agent does when it runs. − On the Error Handler tab, you define actions to run if the first set of actions on the Actions tab fails. • Note the Active check box. OTM only runs automation agents when this check box is marked. • Note the Event. The automation agent runs when this event occurs. You can enter more than one event. 5. Click the Actions tab. Note the icons. • Pencil – Displays the details of the automation agent action for editing its parameters. • Trash can – Deletes an automation agent action. • Green plus sign (+) – Inserts a new automation agent action on the row below. 6. Click Edit (the pencil icon) to the right of the SET INDICTATOR: G action. Note the Indicator Value. Depending on the automation agent action selected, different parameters are available. 7. Close the Agent Action Parameters page. OTM returns to the Actions tab. 8. Click the Error Handler tab. You can add additional actions to run if the first set of actions on the Actions tab fails. Typically, these would notify a contact that an error has occurred.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Automation Agents Chapter 1 - Page 152

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Practice 1 - Creating Automation Agents Creating an Automation Agent 1. Click Business Process Automation > Agents and Milestones > Automation Agent. 2. Click New at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Agent Header tab. 3. Enter an Agent ID of TENDER ACCEPTED INDICATOR. 4. Select an Agent Type of SHIPMENT. 5. Mark the Active check box. 6. Enter an Event of SHIPMENT TENDER – ACCEPTED. 7. Click Save to the right of the Restrictions field. 8. Click View / Enter Actions at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Actions tab. 9. Click Add Action. OTM displays the Agent Action Selection For: TENDER ACCEPTED INDICATOR page. 10. Select the Action of SET INDICATOR. 11. Select the Indicator Value of G (green). 12. Click Save at the bottom of the page. OTM returns to the Actions tab. 13. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM displays the confirmation page.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Creating Automation Agents Chapter 1 - Page 153

a

Solution – Creating an Automation Agent

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Creating an Automation Agent You successfully created an automation agent with the ID of TENDER ACCEPTED INDICATOR.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Creating an Automation Agent Chapter 1 - Page 154

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Lesson 24: Contract Management

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 24: Contract Management Chapter 1 - Page 155

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Lesson 25: Configuring Rate Distance

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 25: Configuring Rate Distance Chapter 1 - Page 156

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Guided Demonstration 1 - Configuring Rate Distances Configuring a Rate Distance 1. Click Contract and Rate Management > Power Data > Contracts > Rate Distance. 2. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM ships with certain rate distance records. 3. Click New at the top of the page. • OTM uses the information on the rate distance to determine how to calculate the distance from one location to another location. • OTM uses the distance type and takes into account the distance cutoffs for estimating purposes. • Rate distance is used to either estimate or lookup distance when calculating a rate or simulating service time. 4. Select a Distance Type of ESTIMATE. When selected, OTM estimates the distance based on the latitude/longitude values on the locations. 5. Select a Distance Type of LOOKUP. When selected, OTM uses pre-defined distance values to determine the distance. These values can be entered into OTM through the Shipment Management > Power Data > Geography > Distance menu option. Or, OTM can communicate with third party software to lookup distances. 6. Mark the Estimate Allowed check box. When this check box is marked, OTM will use the pre-defined distance value if one exists or estimate the distance using the latitude/longitude values on the locations. The distance type should be set to LOOKUP if you selected the Estimate Allowed check box. 7. Enter a Short Distance Cutoff of 10 MI. 8. Enter a Short Distance Factor of 1.6 • To better estimate the distance, OTM multiples the estimated distances which are shorter than the short distance cutoff with the short distance factor and uses the resulting value as the distance. • In this example, for distances less than 10 miles, OTM multiples the calculated distance by a factor of 1.6. 9. Enter a Long Distance Cutoff of 110 MI. 10. Enter a Long Distance Factor of 1.1 • To better estimate the distance, OTM multiples the estimated distances which are longer than the long distance cutoff with the long distance factor and uses the resulting value as the distance. • In this example, for distances greater than 110 miles, OTM multiples the calculated distance by a factor of 1.1. • If the estimated distance value falls between the short distance cutoff and long distance cutoff values, OTM prorates the distance factor between the defined factors. 11. Note the External Distance Engine ID. Instead of entering specific distances into OTM, OTM can communicate with third party software to lookup distances. Please refer to the latest documentation for a current list of supported software.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Configuring Rate Distances Chapter 1 - Page 157

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Configuring Distance in OTM If you select a Distance Type of LOOKUP, OTM uses pre-defined distance values to determine the distance. These values can be entered directly into OTM or OTM can communicate with third party software to lookup distances. Let’s look at where you can set up these pre-defined distance values within OTM. 12. Click Shipment Management > Power Data > Geography > Distance. 13. Enter a Lane ID of AZ-SD. 14. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Distance results page. 15. Click the ID. OTM displays the Distance Lookup view page. Each distance in OTM must specify a lane ID, a rate distance ID, and a value. 16. Click the Lane ID of AZ-SD. OTM displays the Lane Definitions view page in a new window. • The lane connects two geographic points. The geographic points can be specific, such as a street address, or more general, such as a state or region. • For distances, lanes define the start and end point to which the distance value applies. In this example, the lane is general from Arizona to San Diego, California. • If you are using distance values to calculate rates, you are going to want your distances to be very specific. 17. Close the Lane Definitions view page. OTM returns to the Distance Lookup page. • Note the Rate Distance ID. This tells OTM how to calculate the distance. OTM ships with three options: − ESTIMATE – OTM estimates the rate distance based on the latitude and longitude on the locations. − LOOKUP ONLY – OTM uses the distance tables or a third-party software package to calculate distance. − LOOKUP ELSE ESTIMATE – OTM first tries use the distance tables or a third-party software packaged to calculate distances. If a result is not returned, then OTM estimates the distance based on the latitude and longitude on the locations. • Note the Value. This is the distance value which applies to the lane specified in the Lane ID field. • In this example, the distance from Arizona to San Diego, California is 355 miles.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Configuring Rate Distances Chapter 1 - Page 158

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Lesson 26: Configuring Rate Service

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 26: Configuring Rate Service Chapter 1 - Page 159

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Rate Services Creating a Rate Service In this guided demonstration, the focus is on rate services that relate to truckload. Rate services associated with other modes are covered in later lessons. 1. Click Contract and Rate Management > Contract Management > Rate Service. 2. Enter a Rate Service ID of SIMULATION TL. 3. Click Search at the bottom of the page. 4. Click the ID. • Note the Rate Service Type. There are a number of rate service types available which calculate transit time based on different factors. Depending on the rate service type selected, the fields on the Rate Service Details tab are different. • In this example, the rate service type of SIMULATION calculates transit time based on the distance and speed you define on the Rate Service Details tab as well as any time windows you have defined on other OTM objects such as locations. • Note the Time Window Tolerance: Enter a numeric value for the number of hours you want to add to the pickup and delivery times for shipments. The value you enter adds to the allowable late times established for pickup and delivery at shipment locations. • Note the When the Ignore Delivery Location Calendar check box: When this check box is selected, the drive routing ignores the delivery location calendar. This only applies to Day Duration and Distance Duration. • Note the Max Weight Time per Stop: This is the maximum time allowed to wait to pickup or drop off goods. • Note the Max Long Haul Wait Time: This is used to configure a wait time associated with the first delivery stop after a long haul. There can be a large amount of time between the last pickup and the first delivery stop so use this field to accommodate a wait time for the long haul move. 5. Click the Rate Service Details tab. • Note the HOS Rule Set ID: Indicates which hours of service rules to honor for this rate service. When a shipment is created using this rate service type, the HOS rules associated with it are considered "fresh" at the start of the shipment, and rest time will be inserted into the shipment as required by the rules. An HOS rule set contains a set of HOS rules that when honored, verifies a driver is complying with department of transportation requirements. HOS rule sets are used in external drive and simulation types of rate services. • Note the Initial Rest Time. If a driver is not fully rested, OTM can take into account an initial rest time and factor this into the transit time. • Note the Distance, Speed, and Min Transit Time fields. − OTM uses distance and speed values to calculate the rate service speed (or how long the trip takes). − The min transit time is the absolute minimum time it takes to move from one location to another. OTM uses this time if the calculated transit time is less than the minimum transit time. − For example, a truck is traveling a distance of 90 miles. OTM calculates the transit time as 90MI / 45MPH = 2H (hours) and then adds any time windows required. If

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Rate Services Chapter 1 - Page 160

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

you have set a min transit time of 3 hours, OTM will use that value if the calculated time is less than the min transit time. Creating a Rate Service with Different Rate Service Types The Rate Service Details tab looks different depending on the rate service type selected. We’ll look at a couple examples. 6. Click the Rate Service Header tab. 7. Select a Rate Service Type of LOOKUP. 8. Click the Rate Service Details tab. In this example, you define the transit time for each lane. A lane connects two geographical points and can be specific (i.e. a street address) or general (i.e. city, province, country, or region). For example, the transit time between US zip code 19406 and the location Los Angeles General Store is three days, 18 hours, and 30 minutes. 9. Click the Rate Service Header tab. 10. Select a Rate Service Type of GROUNDSERVICE. 11. Click the Rate Service Details tab. In this example, you are using a repetition schedule to determine the frequency and location routing for a shipment. These are typically created for repetitive rail and truck routes. 12. Click the Rate Service Header tab. 13. Select a Rate Service Type of EXTERNALDRIVE. 14. Click the Rate Service Details tab. • Note the HOS Rule Set ID. See the explanation under the rate service type of simulation. • Note the External Service Engine ID. You can refer to a third party software package which communicates with OTM and provides transit time information. Refer to the latest documentation for a current list of supported third party software. 15. Click the Rate Service Header tab. 16. Select a Rate Service Type of DISTANCEDURATION. 17. Click l (list) next to Calendar. 18. Select any calendar. OTM requires a calendar when the rate service type is DISTANCEDURATION to account for holidays and weekends. 19. Click Finish at the top of the page. OTM returns to the Rate Service Header tab. 20. Click the Rate Service Details tab. In this case, you define the transit time in number of days within a distance radius. You can define your distance in mileage bands and, for each band, specify the transit time. 21. Click the Rate Service Header tab. 22. Select a Rate Service Type of DAYDURATION. This rate service type also requires a calendar. 23. Click the Rate Service Details tab. This rate service type is similar to DISTANCEDURATION, but you define the transit time per lane instead of per mileage bands. You specify the lane and the corresponding service

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Rate Services Chapter 1 - Page 161

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

days. You can also set this up by rate zone. This rate service type may be used for LTL, parcel, or rail rates.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Rate Services Chapter 1 - Page 162

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Practice 1 - Creating Rate Services for Truckload Creating a Rate Service 1. Click Contract and Rate Management > Contract Management > Rate Service. 2. Click New at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Rate Service Header tab. 3. Enter a Rate Service ID of SIMULATION TL. 4. Select the Rate Service Type of SIMULATION. 5. Click Details at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Rate Service Details tab. 6. Enter a Distance of 10 MI. 7. Enter a Speed of 20 MPH. 8. Click Save to the right of the Min Transit Time field. 9. Enter a Distance of 100 MI. 10. Enter a Speed of 45 MPH. 11. Click Save to the right of the Min Transit Time field. 12. Enter a Distance of 1000 MI. 13. Enter a Speed of 55 MPH. 14. Click Save to the right of the Min Transit Time field. 15. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM displays the confirmation page.

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

s ) ha

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Creating Rate Services for Truckload Chapter 1 - Page 163

a

Solution – Creating Rate Services for Truckload

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Creating a Rate Service You successfully created a rate service with an ID of SIMULATION TL.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Creating Rate Services for Truckload Chapter 1 - Page 164

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Lesson 27: Creating Rate Offerings for Truckload

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 27: Creating Rate Offerings for Truckload Chapter 1 - Page 165

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Rate Offerings Creating a Rate Offering 1. Click Contract and Rate Management > Contract Management > Rate Offering. 2. Enter an Offering ID of BTT9 TL. 3. Click Search at the bottom of the page. 4. Click the ID. OTM displays the Rate Header tab. 5. Click the Offering Type drop-down list to see the valid offering types. • The Offering Type field determines the attributes OTM displays on the Attributes tab. OTM ships with a list of offering types. Refer to the online help for an explanation of these pre-defined rate offering types.

6.

s ) ha

You can also define your own offering types. Note the following fields: • Note the Service Provider ID. In most cases, a contract, or rate offering, always has a service provider defined. One exception is for LTL rates where you have a published rate which all LTL service providers can use. Service providers usually provide discounts off of the published rate. • Note the Rate Service ID. Every rate offering must have a rate service specified for OTM to calculate transit time. • Note the Transport Mode. Define the transport mode for which this rate offering is valid. OTM ships with a list of transport modes. • Note the Perspective. Define whether this rate offering is valid for buy shipments, sell shipments, or both. • Note the Version. Specify the effective and expiration dates for which this rate offering is valid. • Note the Exchange Rate ID. You can define an exchange rate to be used with this rate offering. This exchange rate is used by OTM when calculating cost. • Note the Active check box. Mark this check box to indicate a rate offering is active and can be used during planning. • Note the Sourcing Template and Sourcing Rate options. These options only pertain when you are using Oracle Transportation Sourcing to source your rates. • Note the many fields for minimum and maximum values related to dimensions and distance. A rate offering will only be used if the shipment being planned honors these constraints. Click the Attributes tab. OTM displays the Attributes tab. • Note the Stops Included in Rate of 2. This indicates the number of free stops included in the rate before stop-off charges apply. Shipments must have a minimum of two stops: a pickup stop and a delivery stop. • Note the Total All Stops of 4. This indicates the total number of pickup stops and delivery stops this rate offering supports. In this case, the rate offering supports the 2 stops included in the rate plus 2 additional stops. If this field is not populated, OTM assumes that an unlimited number of stops are supported by this rate offering.

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

7.

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Rate Offerings Chapter 1 - Page 166

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

• •

•

•

Note the Pickup Stops of 1. Note the Delivery Stops of 3. − The sum of your Pickup Stops field and Delivery Stops field must equal the Total All Stops field. You can also leave these fields blank to allow any combination of pickup and delivery stops. Note the Low Stop of 1 and High Stop of 1. − This indicates the first stop in addition to the stops included in rate. − In this example, if a shipment is built with one additional stop above the stops included in the rate, OTM charges 105.00 USD more. Note the Low Stop of 2 and High Stop of 2. − This indicates the second stop in addition to the stops included in rate. − In this example, if a shipment is built with two additional stops above the stops included in the rate, OTM charges 105.00 USD for the first stop and 130.00 USD for the second stop. Note: The sum of your highest High Stop field and Stops Included in Rate field should equal the Total All Stops field. In this example, you have: − Stops Included in Rate of 2 PLUS − High Stop of 2 EQUALS − Total All Stops of 4 Note the Rate Distance ID of LOOKUP ONLY. For this rate offering, OTM uses this rate distance to calculate the distance between the locations. For certain offering types, a rate distance is not required. Note the fields related to circuity which are the Circuity Allows Percentage, Circuity Distance Cost, Maximum Circuity Penalty, and Maximum Circuity Distance fields. You can use these fields to determine the cost for out of route miles. So if your rate covers two stops which you expect to be about 100 miles, you can allow for a small out of route distance of an additional 10% or 10 more miles, and then charge for anything over that percentage. For example, there were originally two stops (A and B) which covered 100 miles, but a stop C was added which caused the shipment to go out of route and brought the total miles to 120. You could charge an additional out of route or circuity cost for the extra 10 miles.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n • a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r • a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no •

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Rate Offerings Chapter 1 - Page 167

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Practice 1 - Creating Rate Offerings for Truckload Creating a Rate Offering for Truckload 1. Click Contract and Rate Management > Contract Management > Rate Offering. 2. Click New at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Rate Header tab. 3. Enter an Offering ID of BTT9 TL. 4. Select an Offering Type of TL. 5. Enter a Service Provider ID of BTT9 (from previous exercise). 6. Enter a Rate Service ID of SIMULATION TL (from previous exercise). 7. Select a Transport Mode of TL. 8. Select a Perspective of Buy. 9. Enter a Version of UNTIL 2018 (already created). 10. Click Attributes at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Attributes tab. 11. Enter a Stops Included in Rate of 2. 12. Enter a Total All Stops of 4. 13. Enter Pickup Stops of 1. 14. Enter Delivery Stops of 3. 15. Enter a Low Stop of 1. 16. Enter a High Stop of 1. 17. Enter a Per Stop Charge of 105.00 USD. 18. Click Save to the right of the Per Stop Charge field. 19. Enter a Low Stop of 2. 20. Enter a High Stop of 2. 21. Enter a Per Stop Charge of 130.00 USD. 22. Click Save to the right of the Per Stop Charge field. 23. Enter a Rate Distance ID of LOOKUP ONLY. 24. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM displays the confirmation page.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Creating a Rate Offering for Truckload 25. Click Create Another. (Contract and Rate Management > Contract Management > Rate Offering) OTM displays the Rate Header tab. 26. Enter an Offering ID of ATL9 TL. 27. Select an Offering Type of TL. 28. Enter a Service Provider ID of ATL9 (from previous exercise). 29. Enter a Rate Service ID of SIMULATION TL (from previous exercise). 30. Select a Transport Mode of TL. 31. Select a Perspective of Buy. 32. Enter a Version of UNTIL 2018 (already created). 33. Click Attributes at the bottom of the page. Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Creating Rate Offerings for Truckload Chapter 1 - Page 168

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43.

OTM displays the Attributes tab. Enter a Stops Included In Rate of 2. Enter a Total All Stops of 3. Enter Pickup Stops of 1. Enter Delivery Stops of 2. Enter a Low Stop of 1. Enter a High Stop of 1. Enter a Per Stop Charge of 100.00 USD. Click Save to the right of the Per Stop Charge field. Enter a Rate Distance of LOOKUP ONLY. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM displays the confirmation page.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Creating Rate Offerings for Truckload Chapter 1 - Page 169

a

Solution – Creating Rate Offerings for Truckload

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Creating a Rate Offering for Truckload You successfully created a rate offering with an ID of BTT9 TL. You successfully created a rate offering with an ID of ATL9 TL.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Creating Rate Offerings for Truckload Chapter 1 - Page 170

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Lesson 28: Creating Rate Records for Truckload

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 28: Creating Rate Records for Truckload Chapter 1 - Page 171

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Rate Records Creating a Rate Record for Truckload 1. Click Contract and Rate Management > Contract Management > Rate Record. 2. Click New at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Rate Offering search tab. Whenever you create a new rate record, you must associate it with a rate offering. 3. Click Contract and Rate Management > Contract Management > Rate Record. 4. Enter a Rate Record ID of BTT9 AZ-CA. 5. Click Search at the bottom of the page. 6. Click the ID. OTM displays the Lane Info tab. • There are options that can be specified on both the rate offering and rate record. As a general principle, OTM uses the value in the more specific object if it is specified in both places. The rate record is more specific than the rate offering. − For example, the stop-off charges that were discussed in the rate offering lesson can also be specified on the rate record. If stop-off charges are specified in both places, the data on the rate record is used. • Note the Rate Offering ID. Every rate record must be associated with a rate offering. You can have multiple rate records associated with one rate offering. 7. Click the Source Geo Hierarchy drop-down list. • The geo hierarchy drop-down list defines the general start and end points for the rate record. Regions can also be used to define this information. • You can select the appropriate geo hierarchy for the rate you are defining. In this example, the source geo hierarchy is STATE/PROVINCE. 8. Click the Destination Geo Hierarchy drop-down list. • Note the destination geo hierarchy of STATE/PROVINCE. You can combine different geo hierarchies. For example, from location to country. • The source geo hierarchy and destination geo hierarchy determine the fields that appear on the Attributes tab. 9. Click Attributes at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Attributes tab. • Note the Source Geography Province Code of AZ. OTM can only use this rate record if the potential shipment departs from Arizona. Since we specified STATE/PROVINCE as our source geo hierarchy on the Lane Info tab, the source geography is province code. • Note the Destination Geography Province Code of CA. OTM can only use this rate record if the potential shipment arrives in California. • This is also where you set up rate record specific stop-off information. If you enter stopoff information here, it overrides stop-off information defined on the rate offering. 10. Click Rate Costs at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Rate Costs tab. • Note the Multi-Costs Rule drop-down list. You can define many costs on this page. The multi-cost rule determines how OTM should combine these costs into one total cost. − Add – OTM adds all valid costs listed on the Rate Costs tab and determines a final total for the shipment.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Rate Records Chapter 1 - Page 172

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

− Minimum – OTM calculates the lowest valid cost and uses that for the shipment. − Maximum – OTM calculates the highest valid cost and uses that for the shipment. • Note this rate record contains one rate cost. If this rate record is used for a buy shipment, a rate cost of 600.00 USD per shipment is applied. 11. Click Add A Cost at the bottom of the page. The Rates page contains the following sections: • Conditions define when OTM should apply a rate cost. Up to 4 conditional rules can exist for each rate cost. If you have multiple conditional rules, you can specify how they relate to each other: − AND – All the rules must be satisfied for this rate cost to be applied. − OR – One of the rules must be satisfied for this rate cost to be applied. − SELECTED – OTM finds valid matches for your first conditional rule and then only passes those matches onto the next conditional rule. • Charge defines what costs OTM should apply when shipments meet the criteria specified in the Conditions section. − There are 4 Cost Types to choose from: − Charge – You can enter an Amount, a Basis, and the Unit. There are many basis options available such as per shipment, per weight, per distance, etc. You can limit the basis options OTM displays in the list by marking only certain basis options as enabled or select the basis options you want to display per rate offering type. − Discount – You can enter an Apply Discount Of percentage which applies a discount to the current running total of shipment costs. − External – You can enter an External Rating Engine ID if the rate is determined by an external rating engine. − Profile – You can set up unit breaks such as weight or volume breaks. − You can also specify a Minimum Charge or a Maximum Charge. If you define many costs, you can define certain rate costs as the minimum or maximum. Depending on the setting of the Multi-Costs Rule drop-down list, OTM selects the appropriate rate cost. • Options define the type of rate you entered in the Charge section. You must indicate if the cost is normal, minimum, maximum, or weighted. You can also add addition rate information such as rounding details. • Miscellaneous defines tariff information about the schedule of prices that a service provider publishes for the movement of freight.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Rate Records Chapter 1 - Page 173

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Practice 1 - Creating Rate Records for Truckload Creating a Rate Record for Truckload 1. Click Contract and Rate Management > Contract Management > Rate Record. 2. Click New at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Rate Offering search tab. Whenever you create a new rate record, you must associate it with a rate offering. 3. Enter a Rate Offering ID of BTT9 TL (previously created). 4. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Rate Offering results page. 5. Ensure the option button next to BTT9 TL is marked. 6. Click Finish at the top of the page. OTM displays the Lane Info tab. 7. Enter a Rate Record ID of BTT9 AZ-CA. 8. Select the Source Geo Hierarchy of STATE/PROVINCE. 9. Select the Destination Geo Hierarchy of STATE/PROVINCE. 10. Click Attributes at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Attributes tab. 11. Enter the Source Geography Province Code of AZ. 12. Enter the Destination Geography Province Code of CA. 13. Click Rate Costs at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Rate Costs tab. 14. Click Add A Cost at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Rates page. 15. Ensure a Cost Type of Charge is selected. 16. Enter an Amount of 600.00 USD. 17. From the Basis drop-down list, select Shipment. 18. Click Save at the bottom of the page. OTM returns to the Rate Costs tab. 19. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM displays the confirmation page.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Creating Rate Record for Truckload 20. Click Contract and Rate Management > Contract Management > Rate Record. 21. Click New at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Rate Offering search tab. Whenever you create a new rate record, you must associate it with a rate offering. 22. Enter a Rate Offering ID of ATL9 TL. 23. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Rate Offering results page. 24. Ensure the option button next to ATL9 TL is marked. 25. Click Finish at the top of the page. OTM displays the Lane Info tab. Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Creating Rate Records for Truckload Chapter 1 - Page 174

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37.

Enter a Rate Record ID of ATL9 850-CA. Select a Source Geo Hierarchy of USZIP3. Select a Destination Geo Hierarchy of STATE/PROVINCE. Click Attributes at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Attributes tab. Enter a Source Geography Postal Code of 850. Enter a Destination Geography Province Code of CA. Click Rate Costs at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Rate Costs tab. Click Add A Cost at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Rates page. Ensure a Cost Type of Charge is selected. Enter an Amount of 550.00 USD. From the Basis drop-down list, select Shipment. Click Save at the bottom of the page. OTM returns to the Rate Costs tab. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM displays the confirmation page.

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid 38. @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

s ) ha

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Creating Rate Records for Truckload Chapter 1 - Page 175

a

Solution – Creating Rate Records for Truckload

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Creating a Rate Record for Truckload You successfully created a rate record with an ID of BTT9 AZ-CA. You successfully created a rate record with an ID of ATL9 850-CA.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Creating Rate Records for Truckload Chapter 1 - Page 176

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Lesson 29: Configuring Rate Preference and Rate Quality Factor

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 29: Configuring Rate Preference and Rate Quality Factor Chapter 1 - Page 177

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating and Enabling Rate Preferences Creating a Rate Preference Rate preference enables you to configure preferred rates for a lane or rate zone. When OTM plans shipments, it will use one of the rates on this preferred list. Note: The transport mode is important for rate preference since OTM also considers all applicable rates for transport modes with no rate preference defined. 1. Click Contract and Rate Management > Contract Management > Rate Preference. 2. Enter a Rate Preference ID of AZ CA TL. 3. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Rate Preference results page. 4. Click the ID. OTM displays the Rate Preference manager. • Note the Lane ID and Rate Zone Profile ID fields. OTM only uses this rate preference for shipments in the geographic area defined by the lane and/or rate zone profile. A rate zone profile can contain multiple lanes. • Note the Effective Date and Expiration Date fields. You can define when your rate preference is valid. • Note the Rate Offering ID. List the preferred rate offerings which OTM should consider in the specified geographic area.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a Enabling a Rate Preference ulik e this h ฺ ik to ospecify Once you create a rate preference, you need us it in a parameter set. Defining h t r t parameters in a parameter set enables eto build shipments based on your business (ka OTM s t process. n t e u li>cPower m i 5. Click Shipment h Management Data > General > Parameter Sets. e t l n b 6. Enter a Parameter raID of RATE PREF ON. ka feSet i l u s 7. Click H Search nat the bottom of the page. a k r i t OTM displays the Parameter Sets results page. arth non8. 9.

Click the ID. Click the Collapse All button at the bottom of the page. • Note the different sections of the parameter set page. You can set parameters for Bulk Plan, Container Optimization, Multistop, and other areas as well. OTM ships with a default setting for each parameter which you can override based on your business processes. 10. Locate the Bulk Plan section and click the + sign next to BULK PLAN. The Bulk Plan section expands and you now see all of the bulk plan parameters. • Note the first column defines the parameter name. • Note the second column defines the default value for the parameter. • Note the third column defines the override value if one is selected. 11. Scroll down to the USE RATE PREFERENCE parameter. • Note there are 3 values available for the USE RATE PREFERENCE parameter: − 0.Do Not Use Preferred Rates – This is the default value. If you do not set this parameter to something other than the default value, OTM disregards your rate Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating and Enabling Rate Preferences Chapter 1 - Page 178

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

preferences while planning shipments and looking up rates in the international rate query. − 1.Preferred Rates Only – This tells OTM to only use preferred rates. Non-preferred rates will not be considered during planning. − 2.Preferred Rates If Available – This tells OTM to use preferred rates if they are specified. If preferred rates have not been specified, then OTM can consider nonpreferred rates during planning. • Once you create a new parameter set, you can assign it to your domain or user preferences so OTM will use it during planning. If you are manually planning a shipment, certain shipment actions enable you to select a parameter set. Note: The online documentation contains a description for each parameter in the parameter set. From the parameter set page, click the Help link at the top of the page. On the parameter sets help page, click the link to view the List of Parameters topic.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating and Enabling Rate Preferences Chapter 1 - Page 179

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Practice 1 - Creating and Enabling Rate Preferences Creating a Rate Preference 1. Click Contract and Rate Management > Contract Management > Rate Preference. 2. Click New at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Rate Preference manager. 3. Enter a Rate Preference ID of AZ CA TL. 4. Select a Perspective of Buy. 5. Enter a Lane ID of AZ-CA (already created). 6. Click l (list) next to the Rate Offering ID. OTM displays the Rate Offering results page. 7. Mark the check box next to ATL9 TL. 8. Mark the check box next to BTT9 TL. 9. Click Finish at the top of the page. OTM returns to the Rate Preference manager. 10. Click Save to the right of Rate Offering ID field. 11. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM displays the confirmation page.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n Enabling a Rate Preference a k OTMthyou is want to consider preferred rates In addition to creating a rate preference, you h must ulitell ฺ e during planning. ik o us h t r t > General > Parameter Sets. a> Power 12. Click Shipment Management Data k e ( s n toft the page. 13. Click New at the bottom e u c i m l OTM displays the hiParameter t le Set page. n b a a 14. Enter alParameter Set ID ik sfer of RATE PREF ON. u H therBulk 15. Within n Plan section, scroll to the USE RATE PREFERENCE parameter. a k i t th Select a-Parameter Value of 2. Preferred Rates If Available. ar16. non 17. Click Finished at the top of the Parameter Set page. OTM displays the confirmation page.

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Creating and Enabling Rate Preferences Chapter 1 - Page 180

a

Solution – Creating and Enabling Rate Preferences

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Creating a Rate Preference You successfully created a rate preference with an ID of AZ CA TL. Enabling a Rate Preference You successfully set the USE RATE PREFERENCE parameter to 2. Preferred Rates If Available.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Creating and Enabling Rate Preferences Chapter 1 - Page 181

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Guided Demonstration 2 - Creating and Assigning a Rate Quality Creating a Rate Quality 1. Click Contract and Rate Management > Power Data > Rates and Codes > Rate Quality Factors. 2. Enter a Rate Quality ID of AZ-CA. 3. Click Search at the bottom of the page. 4. Click the ID. You can define rate quality to help weigh rate offerings or rate records. This enables you to: − Ensure that rates for a certain service provider do not qualify for a shipment or − Ensure a specific rate is chosen even if it does not result in the best planned cost Note the Adjustment Percent and Adjustment Flat fields. − To reduce the weighted cost, enter a percentage value between 0-99 or a negative flat amount. By reducing the weighted cost, you are making service providers look more attractive to OTM during planning. − To increase the weighted cost, enter a percent value larger than 100 or a positive flat amount. By increasing the weighted cost, you are making service providers look less attractive to OTM during planning.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n Assigning the Rate Quality to a Rate Record a s or rate record. In this thioffering ulikit to ea rate Once you create a rate quality, you need to assign h ฺ example, you are assigning it to a rate record. ik o us h t r t a se> Contract 5. Click Contract and Rate Management Management > Rate Record. k ( t n t 6. Enter a Rate Record ID eAZ-CA. u of BTT9 c i m l i 7. Click Search atth the bottomle of the page. n b a a 8. Click the likID. sfer u H 9. Click the Attributes an tab. kIn the Miscellaneous r i t h t section, note the Rate Quality ID assigned to this rate record. ar non

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 2 - Creating and Assigning a Rate Quality Chapter 1 - Page 182

a

Practice 2 - Creating a Rate Quality

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

With your rate preference, Big Texan Trucking and Antelope Line are the preferred carriers. Of those two, even though Big Texan Trucking has a higher flat charge, they provide superior service, so you want OTM to select them as the carrier instead of Antelope Line. Creating a Rate Quality 1. Click Contract and Rate Management > Power Data > Rates and Codes > Rate Quality Factors. 2. Click New at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Rate Quality page. 3. Enter a Rate Quality ID of AZ-CA. 4. Enter an Adjustment Flat of –250.00 USD. Since you are specifying a negative amount, the rates to which you attach this rate quality will look more attractive during planning in OTM. 5. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM displays a confirmation page.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 2 - Creating a Rate Quality Chapter 1 - Page 183

a

Solution – Creating a Rate Quality

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Creating a Rate Quality You successfully created a rate quality with an ID of AZ-CA.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Creating a Rate Quality Chapter 1 - Page 184

a

Practice 3 - Assigning a Rate Quality

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

By assigning your rate quality to your Big Texan Trucking rate record, you are ensuring this rate record looks more attractive during planning as compared to the rates for Antelope Line. Assign a Rate Quality to a Rate Record 1. Click Contract and Rate Management > Contract Management > Rate Record. 2. Enter a Rate Record ID of BTT9 AZ-CA. 3. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Rate Record results page. 4. Click the ID. OTM displays the Lane Info tab. 5. Click the Attributes tab. OTM displays the Attributes tab. 6. Enter a Rate Quality ID of AZ-CA. 7. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM displays the confirmation page.

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

s ) ha

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 3 - Assigning a Rate Quality Chapter 1 - Page 185

a

Solution – Assigning a Rate Quality

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Assign a Rate Quality to a Rate Record You successfully assigned your rate quality to the BTT9 AZ-CA rate record.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Assigning a Rate Quality Chapter 1 - Page 186

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Lesson 30: Querying for Truckload Rates

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 30: Querying for Truckload Rates Chapter 1 - Page 187

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Practice 1 - Querying for Truckload Rates Querying for Truckload Rates 1. Click the Rates link within the Ask Oracle taskbar. 2. Ensure that Rates is selected in the Find drop-down list. 3. In the Ship From section, enter a Location ID of PHOENIX DC. 4. In the Ship To section, enter a Location ID of LOS ANGELES STORE. Location data is required for OTM to find your rates. 5. In the Additional Constraints section, enter an Equipment Group Profile ID of 48FT TRAILERS COMPAT. 6. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM should return both your Big Texan Trucking rate and your Antelope Line rate. 7. Enter the results of the rate query below: Field

Enter Your Results…

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid Cost @ t ut dent m i h Stu ntResults… Field Enterk Your a uli e this h Rate Offering ID for ฺ ik o us h BTT9 t r a se t k ( Cost tt cen u m li i h e t l Querying for Rates anInquiry raatbthe bottom of the results page. likNew e 8. Click u the f s H raFrom n 9. ik In the Ship section, enter a Location ID of PHOENIX DC. t h t n r a 10. Inntheo Ship To section, enter a Location ID of SAN DIEGO STORE.

s ) ha

Rate Offering ID for ATL9

K

Location data is required for OTM to find your rates. 11. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM should return both your Big Texan Trucking rate and your Antelope Line rate. 12. Enter the results of the rate query below: Field

Enter Your Results…

Rate Offering ID for ATL9 Cost

Field

Enter Your Results…

Rate Offering ID for BTT9 Cost Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Querying for Truckload Rates Chapter 1 - Page 188

a

Solution – Querying for Truckload Rates You successfully queried for rates.

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Querying for Truckload Rates OTM displays the following results: Field

Enter Your Results…

Rate Offering ID for ATL9

ATL9 TL

Cost

550.00 USD

Field

Enter Your Results…

Rate Offering ID for BTT9

BTT9 TL

Cost

600.00 USD

K

Cost

600.00 USD

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid Querying for Truckload Rates @ t ut dent OTM displays the following results: m i h Stu tResults… Field Enter Your n a ik this Rate Offering ID for ATL9 TLhul ฺ e k s ATL9 i u h t to ar550.00 k Cost USD e ( tt cens u im le li h t Enter Your Results… an Field ab r k i l e f s ID for BTT9 TL HuRateraOffering n k i t BTT9 arth non-

s ) ha

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Querying for Truckload Rates Chapter 1 - Page 189

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Lesson 31: Creating Rate Offerings and Rate Records for Less Than Truckload

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 31: Creating Rate Offerings and Rate Records for Less Than Truckload Chapter 1 - Page 190

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Weight Break Profiles Viewing an Existing Weight Break Profile 1. Click Contract and Rate Management > Power Data > Rates and Codes > Rate Unit Break Profiles. 2. Enter a Rate Unit Break Profile ID of LTL WEIGHT BREAKS. 3. Click Search at the bottom of the page. 4. Click the ID. This is an example of a rate unit break defining a weight break. There are a total of 6 bands and each contains a maximum weight. For example, the rate unit break ID of 00501-01000 is a weight range from 501 LB to 1000 LB. Creating a Weight Break Profile 5. Click New at the top of the page. 6. Click the Lookup Type drop-down list. Note the three lookup types: • CONTINUOUS RANGE – Specified by min values – OTM matches an actual value to a range between the break values you define where the range is defined as an inclusive minimum. • CONTINUOUS RANGE – Specified by max values – OTM matches an actual value to a range between the break values you define where the range is defined as an inclusive maximum. • LOOKUP EXACT VALUE – OTM matches an actual value to the exact value defined in the break value field. 7. Select a Lookup Type of CONTINUOUS RANGE – Specified by max values. 8. Click the Data Type drop-down list. There are different data types available including UNIT OF MEASURE. The data type determines the type of rate unit break you are creating. 9. Select a Data Type of UNIT OF MEASURE. 10. Click the UOM Type drop-down list. Depending on the data type selected, you may be able to select a UOM type. By selecting a data type of UNIT OF MEASURE, you must also specify the UOM type. 11. Select a UOM Type of WEIGHT. • Note the Rate Unit Break ID. This must be unique across all rate unit break profiles in your domain. • Note the Break Value. Depending on the lookup type selected, enter the rate unit break as a minimum, maximum, or exact value.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Creating Weight Break Profiles Chapter 1 - Page 191

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Guided Demonstration 2 - Viewing Base Rate Offerings and Creating Rate Records Viewing a Base Rate Offering 1. Click Contract and Rate Management > Contract Management > Rate Offering. 2. Enter a Rate Offering ID of PUBLISHED LTL. 3. Click Search at the bottom of the page. 4. Click the ID. Since the rate offering is in a different domain, OTM displays the Rate Offering view page. • Note the Service Provider ID. Since many service providers offer discounts off of this published rate, you can leave the Service Provider ID blank. Each master rate will have a specific service provider. • Note the Offering Type. You define published LTL contracts as LTL – BASE which shows as LTL BASE TARIFF. This is the only offering type that does not require you to enter a service provider.

s ) ha

om c ฺ Creating a Base Rate Record le eฺ c a 5. Click Actions > Contract and Rate > Change Rates > Create Rate orRecord. uid @ G t OTM displays the Lane Info tab. ut dent m i 6. Enter a Rate Record ID of DEMO PUBLISHED LTLtRATE. h Stu n a 7. Select a Source Geo Hierarchy of COUNTRY. ulik e this h 8. Select a Destination Geo Hierarchy ofฺCOUNTRY. s Hierarchy. Typically these are broader ik o uGeo h t Note the Source Geo Hierarchy and Destination r t geographical areas for the base rates. For example, your base (karatenthan se for theandmaster t t e rates could have a geouhierarchy of state-state your master rates could use 3-digit US c i m l i zip codes. th able n a 9. Click Attributes r bottom of the page. lik satfethe u OTM H displays nthe Attributes tab. a k r i t th Enterona -Source Geography Country Code ID of USA. r10. a n a Destination Geography Country Code ID of USA. K 11. Enter 12. Click Rate Costs at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Rate Costs tab. 13. Click Add A Cost. OTM displays the Rates page. 14. In the Conditions section, select a Basis of Ship Unit Line Item NMFC Class. 15. Select an Operator of =. 16. Enter a Value(s) of 60.0 for the NMFC Class. Note the conditional rule of Ship Unit Line Item NMFC Class = 60.0. OTM can only use this rate cost if the items on the order have an NMFC Class of 60.0. 17. In the Charge section, select a Cost Type of Profile. This lets OTM know that you want to use a rate unit break profile. The Rates page refreshes to show additional fields. 18. Select a Rate Unit Break Profile ID 1 of LTL WEIGHT BREAKS. 19. Enter a Selector of Shipment Total Weight. Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 2 - Viewing Base Rate Offerings and Creating Rate Records Chapter 1 - Page 192

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

20. Select a Basis of Shipment Total Weight. 21. Enter a Unit of 100 LB. To define this as a per cwt rate, enter a basis Shipment Total Weight, a unit of 100 and a unit of measure of LB. 22. Click Edit Unit Breaks to add the costs for each weight band. 23. For the Max 500 LB band, enter a Charge Amount of 4.00 USD. 24. For the Max 1000 LB band, enter a Charge Amount of 3.89 USD. 25. For the Max 5000 LB band, enter a Charge Amount of 3.79 USD. 26. For the Max 10000 LB band, enter a Charge Amount of 3.69 USD. 27. For the Max 15000 LB band, enter a Charge Amount of 3.59 USD. 28. For the Max 20000 LB band, enter a Charge Amount of 2.06 USD. 29. Click Save at the bottom of the Rate Unit Break page. 30. Click Save at the bottom of the Rates page. 31. Close the Rate Record page.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 2 - Viewing Base Rate Offerings and Creating Rate Records Chapter 1 - Page 193

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Guided Demonstration 3 - Viewing Master Rate Offerings and Rate Records Viewing a Master Rate Offering 1. Click Contract and Rate Management > Contract Management > Rate Offering. 2. Enter a Rate Offering ID of LON9 LTL. 3. Click Search at the bottom of the page. 4. Click the ID. OTM displays the Rate Header tab. • Note the Offering Type. For discount rates off of a published rate, you select LTL – MASTER. • Note the Service Provider ID. You must enter the service provider for which this contract is valid. 5. Click the Attributes tab. Note the Base Rate Offering. This defines the published rate for which the service provider is offering a discount.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid Viewing a Master Rate Record @ t 6. Click Actions at the top of the page. ut dent m i 7. Click OK in the message box. th Stu n a 8. Click Contract and Rate > View > Show Related is lik Rate hRecords. t u h ฺ e 9. Click Edit at the top of the Rate Record ik viewopage. us h t r OTM displays the Lane Info tab. t (kaandnDestination se t Note the Source Geo Hierarchy Geo Hierarchy. Typically, this is more t e u c i specific than what iis defined on the base rate. m l th tab.ble n 10. Click the Rate Costs a a lik the er Costs tab. f OTM u displays Rate s H anpencil icon) to the right of the Description field. kClick Edit-tr(the i 11. h t n r nodisplays the Rates page. Ka OTM •

Note the Cost Type. The cost type of Discount tells OTM to apply the specified discount to the rate. • In the Charge section, note the Apply Discount Of field. OTM calculates a total cost of 80% of the published rate for this lane. 12. Close the Rates page.

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 3 - Viewing Master Rate Offerings and Rate Records Chapter 1 - Page 194

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Practice 1 - Creating Master Rate Offerings Creating a Master Rate Offering 1. Click Contract and Rate Management > Contract Management > Rate Offering. 2. Click New at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Rate Header tab. 3. Enter an Offering ID of LON9 LTL. 4. Select an Offering Type of LTL - MASTER. 5. Enter a Service Provider ID of LON9 (already created). 6. Enter a Rate Service ID of LTL AZ CA (already created). 7. Select a Transport Mode of LTL. 8. Select a Perspective of Buy. 9. Enter a Version of UNTIL 2018 (already created). 10. Click Attributes at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Attributes tab. 11. Enter a Rate Distance ID of LOOKUP ONLY. 12. Enter a Base Rate Offering of PUBLISHED LTL (already created). 13. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM displays the confirmation page.

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

s ) ha

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Creating Master Rate Offerings Chapter 1 - Page 195

a

Solution – Creating Master Rate Offerings

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

You successfully created a master rate offering with an ID of LON9 LTL.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Creating Master Rate Offerings Chapter 1 - Page 196

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Practice 2 - Creating Master Rate Records Creating a Master Rate Record 1. Click Contract and Rate Management > Contract Management > Rate Record. 2. Click New at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the rate offering search page. Whenever you create a new rate record, you have to associate your rate record with a rate offering. 3. Enter a Rate Offering ID of LON9 LTL (from previous exercise). 4. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Rate Offering results page. 5. Click Finish at the top of the page. OTM displays the Lane Info tab. 6. Enter a Rate Record ID of LON9 850-921. 7. Select a Source Geo Hierarchy of USZIP3. 8. Select a Destination Geo Hierarchy of USZIP3. 9. Click Attributes at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Attributes tab. 10. Enter a Source Geography Postal Code of 850. 11. Enter a Destination Geography Postal Code of 921. 12. Click Rate Costs at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Rate Costs tab. 13. Click Add A Cost. OTM displays the Rates page. 14. Select a Cost Type of Discount. 15. Enter an Apply Discount Of of 20 %. 16. Click Save at the bottom of the page. OTM returns to the Rate Costs tab. 17. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM displays the confirmation page.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no Querying for Rates 18. Click the Rates link within the Ask Oracle taskbar. 19. Select a Find option of Rates. 20. Enter the Ship From Location ID of PHOENIX DC. 21. Enter the Ship To Location ID of SAN DIEGO STORE. Location data is required for OTM to find your rates. 22. Scroll down to the Transport Modes section. 23. Enter a Transport Mode ID of LTL. 24. Click Save to the far right of the Transport Modes grid. 25. Scroll down to the Commodities section which is at the very bottom of the page. 26. Select a Flexible Commodity Qualifier of NMFC_CLASS. 27. Enter a Commodity Code of 60.0. 28. Enter a Transport Handling Unit of 4X4 PALLET. Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 2 - Creating Master Rate Records Chapter 1 - Page 197

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34.

Enter a Ship Unit Count of 1. Enter a Weight of 4000 LB. Enter a Volume of 1 CU FT. Click Save to the far right of the Commodities grid. Click Search at the bottom of the page. Enter the results of the rate query below: Field

Enter Your Results…

Rate Offering ID for LON9 Cost

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 2 - Creating Master Rate Records Chapter 1 - Page 198

a

Solution – Creating Master Rate Records

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Creating a Master Rate Record You successfully created a master rate record with an ID of LON9 850-921. Querying for Rates Field

Enter Your Results…

Rate Offering ID for LON9

LON9 LTL

Cost

121.28 USD

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Creating Master Rate Records Chapter 1 - Page 199

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Lesson 32: Creating Itineraries

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 32: Creating Itineraries Chapter 1 - Page 200

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Itineraries Viewing an Itinerary 1. Click Shipment Management > Itinerary Management > Itinerary Manager. 2. Enter an Itinerary ID of AZ-CA MULTISTOP. 3. Click Search at the bottom of the page. 4. Click the ID. • Note the Perspective. This determines whether OTM can use this itinerary for buy shipments, sell shipments, or both (ALL). • Note the Itinerary Type. − Active means the itinerary is used in shipment planning. − Inactive means the itinerary is not used in shipment planning. − Manual means the itinerary should only be used when running certain shipment actions. • Note the Source Geo Hierarchy and the Destination Geo Hierarchy. These define the general start and end information of a lane. • Note the Multi-Stop Itinerary check box. This must be marked for OTM to build a multistop shipment. • In the Details section, you can limit the use of this itinerary by requiring an order to be within certain weight and volume limits. 5. Click the Lane Definitions tab. • Note that the fields on this tab change depending on the source and destination geo hierarchies selected on the Parameters tab. For example, if you selected a source geo hierarchy of POSTAL_CODE on the Parameters tab, OTM displays a Postal Code field on the Lane Definitions tab. • Note the Source and Destination Geography Province Code fields. In this example, the source geography province code is AZ and the destination geography province code is CA. This itinerary will only be used to plan shipments from Arizona to California. 6. Click the List Legs tab. 7. Click Edit (the pencil icon) to the right of the Mode Profile ID field. • The leg details page allows you to limit the use of this multi-stop itinerary. Most commonly, you want to limit its use to only those transport modes that can be used for multi-stop shipments. • Note the Sequence Number. This indicates in what order a shipment would travel through multiple legs. • Note the Primary check box. For multi-leg itineraries, mark the most important leg as primary. • Note the Equipment Assignment Type. This controls how OTM makes equipment assignments for this leg. − Optimize Equipment allows OTM to choose the appropriate equipment for the leg of the shipment. − Re-use Equipment allows OTM to use the same equipment that was selected for previous leg. You should not select Re-use Equipment for the first leg in an itinerary. − No Equipment allows OTM to not assign equipment to the shipment.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Itineraries Chapter 1 - Page 201

a

•

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

•

In the Compatibility section, note the Mode Profile ID. OTM can only use rates that match the transport modes in this profile. Note the Equipment Group Profile ID. OTM can only use equipment groups matching the equipment groups in the profile.

Querying for Route and Rate 8. Click the Rates link within the Ask Oracle toolbar. There are two options available at the top of the page in the Find drop-down list: • Rates – When selected, OTM only considers direct rates between the ship from and ship to locations. • Rate And Route – When selected, OTM first finds valid itineraries and then looks for rates that meet the requirements specified on the itinerary. 9. Select a Find option of Rate And Route. 10. Enter a Date Deliver By of today's date plus 3 months. 11. Enter a Ship From Location ID of PHOENIX DC. 12. Enter a Ship To Location ID of SAN DIEGO STORE. 13. Enter a Transport Mode ID of LTL. 14. Click Save to the right of the Transport Mode ID field. 15. Select a Flexible Commodity Qualifier of NMFC_CLASS. 16. Enter a Commodity Code of 60.0. 17. Select a Transport Handling Unit of 4X4 PALLET. 18. Enter a Ship Unit Count of 1. 19. Enter a Weight of 4000 LB. 20. Enter a Volume of 1 CU FT. 21. Click Save to the right of the Value field. 22. Click Search at the bottom of the page.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Itineraries Chapter 1 - Page 202

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Practice 1 - Creating Multi-stop Itineraries Creating a Multi-stop Itinerary 1. Click Shipment Management > Itinerary Management > Itinerary Manager. 2. Click New at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Parameters tab. 3. Enter an Itinerary ID of AZ-CA MULTISTOP. 4. Select the Perspective of Buy. 5. Select the Itinerary Type of Active. 6. Select the Source Geo Hierarchy of STATE/PROVINCE. 7. Select the Destination Geo Hierarchy of STATE/PROVINCE. 8. Mark the Multi-Stop Itinerary check box. 9. Click Lane Definitions at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Lane Definitions tab. 10. Enter the Source Geography Province Code of AZ. 11. Enter the Destination Geography Province Code of CA. 12. Click List Legs at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the List Legs tab. 13. Click New Leg in the middle of the page. OTM displays the Leg details page. 14. Enter Sequence Number of 1. 15. Mark the Primary check box. 16. Select the Equipment Assignment Type of Optimize Equipment. 17. In the Compatibility section, select the Mode Profile ID of LAND. 18. Enter an Equipment Group Profile ID of 48FT TRAILERS COMPAT. 19. Click Save at the bottom of the page. OTM returns to the List Legs tab. 20. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM displays the confirmation page.

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

s ) ha

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Creating Multi-stop Itineraries Chapter 1 - Page 203

a

Solution – Creating Multi-stop Itineraries

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

You successfully created an itinerary with an ID of AZ-CA MULTISTOP.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Creating Multi-stop Itineraries Chapter 1 - Page 204

a

Practice 2 - Querying Route and Rates

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Tasks Querying for Rates There are two options in the Find drop-down list on the Ask Oracle About Rates page: • Rates: Used for direct shipments between one pickup and one delivery point. • Rate and Route: In addition to rate data, this option also uses the itinerary to find the appropriate rate. Field

Enter This Data…

Find drop-down list

Rate and Route

Ship From Location ID

PHOENIX DC

Ship To Location ID

SAN DIEGO STORE

om c ฺ Click Save le eฺ c a or Guid Flexible Commodity NMFC_CLASS @ t Qualifier ut dent m i Commodity Code 60.0 th Stu n a lik this Transport Handling 4X4 PALLET u h ฺ e Unit k s i u h ar1t se to Ship Unit Count k ( n LB tt c4000 e u Weight i m l hi ble 1 CU FT t Volume n lika sfera u Click Save to far right of Commodities grid H ran k i -t Search at the bottom of the page arth nonClick

s ) ha

Transport Mode ID

K

1.

LTL

Enter the results of the rate query below (click the + icon for more details): Field

Enter Your Results…

Itinerary ID Transport Mode Service Provider ID Rate Offering Total Actual Cost Querying for Rates Field

Enter This Data…

Find drop-down list

Rate and Route

Ship From Location ID

PHOENIX DC

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 2 - Querying Route and Rates Chapter 1 - Page 205

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

2.

Ship To Location ID

SAN DIEGO STORE

Rate Offering ID

BTT9 TL

Transport Handling Unit

4X4 PALLET

Ship Unit Count

1

Weight

20000 LB

Volume

2 CU FT

Click

Save

Click

Search

Enter the results of the rate query below: Field

s ) ha

Enter Your Results…

Itinerary ID

om c ฺ le eฺ c a Service Provider ID or Guid @ t Total Actual Cost ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no Transport Mode

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 2 - Querying Route and Rates Chapter 1 - Page 206

a

Solution – Querying Route and Rates You successfully queried the following routes and rates.

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Querying for Rate Field

Enter Your Results…

Itinerary ID

AZ-CA MULTISTOP

Transport Mode

LTL

Service Provider ID

LON9

Rate Offering

LON9 LTL

Total Actual Cost

121.28 USD

Querying for Rates Field

Enter Your Results…

om c ฺ le eฺ c a Transport Mode TL or Guid @ t Service Provider ID BTT9 ut dent m i Total Actual Cost 600.00 USD th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

s ) ha

Itinerary ID

AZ-CA MULTISTOP

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Querying Route and Rates Chapter 1 - Page 207

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Lesson 33: Creating and Releasing Order Bases

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 33: Creating and Releasing Order Bases Chapter 1 - Page 208

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Order Bases Creating an Order Base with Line Items 1. Click Order Management > Purchase Order > Order Base. 2. Enter an Order Base ID of MULTISTOP1. 3. Click Search at the bottom of the page. 4. Click the ID. 5. Click the Order Configuration of ONE_TO_ONE. OTM displays the Order Configuration manager. • An order configuration determines how ship units are created on order bases and releases and how calculations are to be performed when an order is being built. • Note the Order Base/Release Creation field which indicates whether the order release will be entered with lines or with ship units. In this example, Line is selected which means this order release will be entered with lines. • In addition, this order configuration specifies to automatically create one ship unit for the line item. This is specified in the Releasing Logic field. • Note the Ship Unit Creation field which indicates that OTM will automatically create the ship units from the entered line items when the order release created (saved for the first time). 6. Close the Order Configuration manager. 7. Click the Line Item tab. 8. Click Edit (the pencil icon) to the right of the Packaged Item ID of CRACKERS. • Note the Packaged Item ID and Item ID fields. One of these fields must be specified. If you specify an item ID, an auto assign rule should be configured to automatically set the packaged item ID. • Note the Total Package Count. Specify the packaged item you want to ship and the number of those packaged items. Depending on how you defined your packaged item, you can override the values for packaging unit and transport handling unit. • Note the Source Location ID and Destination Location ID fields. Each line item within the order base can have its own set of source and destination locations. • Note the Shippable check box. When this check box is marked, OTM releases the full amount in this line item. • Note the Net Weight and Net Volume fields. Any values you enter here override the weights and volumes defined on the packaged item. • Note the Early Pickup Date and Late Delivery Date. When creating orders in OTM, it is important to add early and late pickup/delivery times for OTM to calculate your transit time. • Note the Released Weight, Released Volume, Released Count, and Quantity Remaining fields. OTM displays how much of your order base line item has already been released. You can see the same information, just below, in the Release Instruction section. 9. Click Edit (the pencil icon) to the right of the existing release instruction. • Note the Release Instruction drop-down list. You can release by item count, weight, or volume.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Order Bases Chapter 1 - Page 209

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

•

10. 11. 12.

13. 14.

Note the Allow Releasing check box. Mark Allow Releasing for OTM to release according to your instructions; alternatively, OTM saves your release instruction without releasing. • You can also modify the source and destination locations as well as change pickup and delivery dates. Click Save at the bottom of the release instruction page. Click Save at the bottom of the line item page. Click Constraints at the bottom of the page. You can ensure OTM builds shipments a certain way based on the constraints you define. You can enter information specific to itineraries, rates, equipment, and service provider. Click Order Base Links at the bottom of the page. You can specify a link between this order and other orders within OTM. Click the Involved Parties tab. At a minimum, you must enter an involved party or contact with an involved party qualifier ID of LOGISTICS for OTM to be able to send a tender notification. Click the Other Attributes tab. Note the Accessorial and Special Service fields. You can specify additional services required for this order. Click the Remarks tab. Use this tab to specify text templates or remarks. Remarks allow you to log any extra information you may want to keep with the order base.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t 16. ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ Updating Pickup and Delivery Dates h onik the Order usReleases t r o t To complete the guided demonstrations laterein this scenario, you need to set the Early Pickup (kalla three sMULTISTOP order releases to current dates. To do t Dates and Late Delivery Dates on n t e u c this, complete the following: im le li h t n rab > Order Release > Order Release. 17. Click OrderaManagement k i l fe ID of MULTISTOP. uan OrdernsBase 18. Enter H ikClick Search 19. tra at the bottom of the page. h t n r a 20. Select no the check boxes for all three order releases: MULTISTOP1-001, MULTISTOP2-001 15.

K

21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27.

and MULTISTOP3-001. Click Edit at the top of the page. On Order Release ID MULTISTOP1-001, enter an Early Pickup Date of today and a Late Delivery Date of three months from today. Click Next at the top of the page. On Order Release ID MULTISTOP2-001, enter an Early Pickup Date of today and a Late Delivery Date of three months from today. Click Next at the top of the page. On Order Release ID MULTISTOP3-001, enter an Early Pickup Date of today and a Late Delivery Date of three months from today. Click Finished at the top of the page to save the changes.

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Order Bases Chapter 1 - Page 210

a

Guided Demonstration 2 - Releasing Order Bases with Line Items

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

In addition to releasing from within the order base line item page, you can use an order base line action to release line items. Releasing an Order Base with Line Items 1. Click Order Management > Purchase Order > Order Base Line. To work with order bases defined with ship units, you can use Order Management > Purchase Order > Order Base Ship Unit. 2. Enter an Order Base ID of MULTISTOP1. 3. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Order Lines results page. 4. Mark the check box next to the ID. 5. Click Actions at the top of the page. Note the actions Release Remaining Order Amount and Release Total Order Amount. These actions quickly release all unreleased line item quantities or all line items in the order base. 6. Click Order Management > Change Order > Release Lines. You can manually release all or part of your order base lines. In this example, all originally ordered crackers have already been released. 7. Close the Order Base Line page.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 2 - Releasing Order Bases with Line Items Chapter 1 - Page 211

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Practice 1 - Creating Order Bases with Line Items Creating the First Order Base with Line Items 1. Click Order Management > Purchase Order > Order Base. 2. Click New at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Order Base tab. 3. Enter an Order Base ID of MULTISTOP1. 4. Select an Order Configuration of ONE_TO_ONE. 5. Select a Reference Number Qualifier of PO. 6. Enter a Reference Number of 54321. 7. Click Save to the right of the Reference Number field. 8. Click Ship Unit at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Line Item tab. 9. Click New Line Item. 10. Enter a Packaged Item ID of CRACKERS (previously created). 11. Enter a Total Package Count of 1350. 12. Enter a Source Location ID of PHOENIX DC (previously created). 13. Enter a Destination Location ID of SAN DIEGO STORE (previously created). 14. Mark the Shippable check box. 15. Enter a Net Weight of 26700 LB. 16. Enter a Net Volume of 400 CU FT. 17. Select an Early Pickup Date of today’s date. 18. Select a Late Delivery Date of today’s date plus 3 months. Note: Since there are a number of fields on the order base, make sure you populate the correct fields. 19. Select a Transport Handling Unit of 4X4 PALLET. 20. Click Save at the bottom of the page. 21. Click Constraints at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Constraints tab. 22. Click Order Base Links at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Order Base Links tab. 23. Click Involved Parties at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Involved Parties tab. 24. Enter an Involved Party Contact of PHOENIX DC PLANNER (previously created). 25. Select the Communication Method of BY CONTACT. 26. Select the Involved Party Qualifier ID of LOGISTICS. 27. Click Save to the far right of the Involved Party Contact field. 28. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM displays the confirmation page.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Creating the Second Order Base with Line Items 29. Click Create Another. (Order Management > Purchase Order > Order Base) 30. Enter an Order Base ID of MULTISTOP2. Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Creating Order Bases with Line Items Chapter 1 - Page 212

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45.

Select an Order Configuration of ONE_TO_ONE. Select a Reference Number Qualifier of PO. Enter a Reference Number of 54322. Click Save to the right of the Reference Number field. Click Ship Unit at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Line Item tab. Click New Line Item. Enter a Packaged Item ID of CHOCOLATE COOKIES (previously created). Enter a Total Package Count of 500. Enter a Source Location ID of PHOENIX DC (previously created). Enter a Destination Location ID of LOS ANGELES STORE (previously created). Mark the Shippable check box. Enter a Net Weight of 12300 LB. Enter a Net Volume of 200 CU FT. Select an Early Pickup Date of today’s date. Select a Late Delivery Date of today’s date plus 3 months. Note: Since there are a number of fields on the order base, make sure you populate the correct fields. Select a Transport Handling Unit of 4X4 PALLET. Click Save at the bottom of the page. Click Constraints at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Constraints tab. Click Order Base Links at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Order Base Links tab. Click Involved Parties at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Involved Parties tab. Enter an Involved Party Contact of PHOENIX DC PLANNER (previously created). Select the Communication Method of BY CONTACT. Select the Involved Party Qualifier ID of LOGISTICS. Click Save to the far right of the Involved Party Contact field. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM displays the confirmation page.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i 46. th Stu n a 47. ulik e this h 48. ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( 49. tt cen u m li i h e t l 50. an erab k i l u nsf H 51. ik n-tra h t r a 52. no 53. 54. 55.

Creating the Third Order Base with Line Items 56. Click Create Another. (Order Management > Purchase Order > Order Base) 57. Enter an Order Base ID of MULTISTOP3. 58. Select an Order Configuration of ONE_TO_ONE. 59. Select a Reference Number Qualifier of PO. 60. Enter a Reference Number of 54323. 61. Click Save to the right of the Reference Number field. 62. Click Ship Unit at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Line Item tab. 63. Click New Line Item. Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Creating Order Bases with Line Items Chapter 1 - Page 213

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

64. 65. 66. 67. 68. 69. 70. 71. 72.

73. 74. 75.

Enter a Packaged Item ID of MOTOR OIL (previously created). Enter a Total Package Count of 500. Enter a Source Location ID of PHOENIX DC (previously created). Enter a Destination Location ID of SAN DIEGO STORE (previously created). Mark the Shippable check box. Enter a Net Weight of 4000 LB. Enter a Net Volume of 200 CU FT. Select an Early Pickup Date of today’s date. Select a Late Delivery Date of today’s date plus 3 months. Note: Since there are a number of fields on the order base, make sure you populate the correct fields. Select a Transport Handling Unit of 4X4 PALLET. Click Save at the bottom of the page. Click Constraints at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Constraints tab. Click Order Base Links at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Order Base Links tab. Click Involved Parties at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Involved Parties tab. Enter an Involved Party Contact of PHOENIX DC PLANNER (previously created). Select the Communication Method of BY CONTACT. Select the Involved Party Qualifier ID of LOGISTICS. Click Save to the far right of the Involved Party Contact field. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM displays the confirmation page.

s ) ha

om c ฺ 76. le eฺ c a or Guid @ t 77. ut dent m i th Stu n a 78. ulik e this h 79. ฺ ik o us h t 80. r a se t k ( 81. tt cen u 82. m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Creating Order Bases with Line Items Chapter 1 - Page 214

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Solution – Creating Order Bases with Line Items Creating an Order Base with Line Items You successfully created an order base with an ID of MULTISTOP1. You successfully created an order base with an ID of MULTISTOP2. You successfully created an order base with an ID of MULTISTOP3.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Creating Order Bases with Line Items Chapter 1 - Page 215

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Lesson 34: Bulk Planning Order Releases

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 34: Bulk Planning Order Releases Chapter 1 - Page 216

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Guided Demonstration 1 - Bulk Planning Order Releases Bulk Planning Order Releases 1. Click Order Management > Order Release > Order Release. 2. Enter an Order Release ID of MULTISTOP. 3. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Order Releases results page. 4. Mark the check box in the header to select the three order releases. 5. Click Actions > Operational Planning > Create Buy Shipment > Bulk Plan – Buy. 6. Select the Parameter Set ID of RATE PREF ON. 7. Note the What-If Scenario check box (do not select it). If selected, OTM only runs a test bulk plan and does not build any shipments. This can be used for testing. Note: For this demonstration, do not select the What-If Scenario check box! 8. Click OK at the bottom of the page. 9. Click Refresh at the bottom of the page to see if the bulk plan has finished running. • When you see an end time, OTM has finished running the bulk plan. 10. Note the Bulk Plan ID. • When you perform a bulk plan, a unique bulk plan ID is created for the bulk plan. This bulk plan ID allows you to view the bulk plan at any time via the Operational Planning > Planning Results > Shipment Planning menu option. 11. Click the Parameter Set ID. • This shows the set of parameters that was used to process this bulk plan. Parameters determine how various processes behave within OTM. 12. Click the Collapse All button at the bottom. • Note how many different sections there are. 13. Click the plus sign (+) next to Bulk Plan. • These parameters are specific to bulk planning. 14. Scroll down and click the plus sign (+) next to Multistop. • These parameters are specific to mutlistop scenarios. 15. Note the second parameter Multistop Config ID. 16. Click the link for Multistop Default in the Default Value column. • The Logic Configuration page for a type of Multistop opens. These are additional parameters for multi-stop shipment planning. • Logic configuration is a collection of related parameters and algorithms used by OTM. A configuration can handle different scenarios and be shared by different parameter sets. 17. Click the Help link in the upper right-hand corner of the page. • This topic shows the navigation from the menu. You don’t have to start at the Bulk Plan results page. You could also view logic configuration by going to Shipment Management > Power Data > General > Logic Configuration. • Note the different logic configuration types such as container optimization, driver configuration and network routing. • Click on any of these help links to view more about that logic configuration type and its associated parameters.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Bulk Planning Order Releases Chapter 1 - Page 217

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

18. Click the Multistop help link. You see more information about each multi-stop logic configuration parameter. 19. Close the Help topic. 20. Close the Logic Configuration page. 21. On the Bulk Plan page, note the Results tab. The Results tab of the Bulk Plan Manager allows you to view informational attributes about the bulk plan results such as: • Start and end time of the bulk planning process • Number of orders selected for bulk planning • Number of orders that were planned onto shipments • Number of orders that were unassigned and re-planned for better shipping opportunities • Number of order movements created, planned and failed. • Number of shipments created • Number of orders that failed to plan • Totals for costs, weight, volume, and distance. 22. Click the Metrics tab. • The Metrics tab has several sections: − The Bulk Plan Level Metrics section summarizes metrics derived from the total bulk plan. − The Mode Metrics section displays summary statistics for shipments based on transportation mode. Each mode appears on a separate row with summary values. − The Service Provider Metrics section displays summary statistics for shipments based on service provider. Each service provider appears on a separate row with summary values. 23. Click the Performance tab. • The Performance tab contains bulk plan level metrics and milestone metrics. • For more details on the expanded Bulk Plan Manager, see the OTM 5.5 CU4: OTM Bulk Plan Functional Overview Transfer of Information (TOI) session. 24. Close the Bulk Plan Manager page.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no Mapping Shipments 25. Click Shipment Management > Shipment Management > Buy Shipments. 26. Click the Order Release tab. 27. Enter an Order Release ID of MULTISTOP. 28. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Buy Shipments results page. 29. Mark the check box in the header to select the both shipments. 30. Click Actions > Shipment Management > Map > Map Shipments. OTM displays the map with your shipments on it. 31. Click the plus sign (+) button in the left-hand corner to zoom in. OTM displays the map with all of your shipments. • Note how your multi-stop shipment is one shipment with many stops and not an individual shipment between each location. Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Bulk Planning Order Releases Chapter 1 - Page 218

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

32. Close the map page.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Bulk Planning Order Releases Chapter 1 - Page 219

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Practice 1 - Bulk Planning Order Releases Bulk Planning Order Releases 1. Click Order Management > Order Release > Order Release. OTM displays the order release finder page. 2. Enter an Order Release ID of MULTI. 3. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Order Releases results page. 4. Mark the check boxes next to your three Order Releases. 5. Click Actions > Operational Planning > Create Buy Shipment > Bulk Plan - Buy. OTM displays the Shipment Planning page. 6. Select the Parameter Set ID of RATE PREF ON. 7. Click OK. OTM displays the Bulk Plan page. 8. Wait a few seconds for the bulk plan process to finish. 9. Click Refresh at the bottom of the page. When you see a Status of COMPLETED and an end time, OTM has finished running the bulk plan. 10. Verify that all three orders were planned into shipments. Note the Orders Planned field and make sure this has 3 listed. 11. Click Actions > View > Shipments. OTM displays the Buy Shipments results page with your shipments listed. 12. Select the check boxes next to all shipments. 13. Click View at the top of the page. 14. Answer the following. View the shipments to find all information.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l f Enter Your Results… u nsField H ra ik nTL-tShipment ID h t r o a n Transport Mode ID

TL

Total Actual Cost (expand the More section) Total Weighted Cost Service Provider ID

Field

Enter Your Results…

LTL Shipment ID Transport Mode ID

LTL

Total Actual Cost (expand the More section) Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Bulk Planning Order Releases Chapter 1 - Page 220

a

Service Provider ID

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

15. Close the Buy Shipment View page. 16. Close the Bulk Plan Manager page. Mapping Your Shipments 17. On the Order Release results page, ensure the check boxes next to all order releases you used during this bulk plan are selected. 18. Click Actions > Order Management > Map > Map Related Shipments. OTM displays the map with all of your shipments. 19. Click the plus sign (+) button in the left-hand corner to zoom in. OTM displays the map with all of your shipments. Note how your multi-stop shipment is one shipment with many stops and not an individual shipment between each location. 20. Close the map shipment page.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Bulk Planning Order Releases Chapter 1 - Page 221

a

Solution – Bulk Planning Order Releases

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Bulk Planning your Order Releases OTM should have created 2 shipments during the bulk plan process. Field

Enter Your Results…

TL Shipment ID

nnnnn

Transport Mode ID

TL

Total Actual Cost

705.00 USD

Total Weighted Cost

455.00 USD

Service Provider ID

BTT9

Field

Enter Your Results…

om c ฺ le eฺ c Transport Mode ID LTL a or Guid Total Actual Cost 122.19 USD @ t ut dent m Service Provider ID LON9 i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

s ) ha

LTL Shipment ID

nnnnn

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Bulk Planning Order Releases Chapter 1 - Page 222

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Lesson 35: Re-sequencing Shipment Stops

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 35: Re-sequencing Shipment Stops Chapter 1 - Page 223

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Guided Demonstration 1 - Re-sequencing Stops Re-sequencing Stops 1. Click Shipment Management > Shipment Management > Buy Shipments. 2. Click the Transport tab. 3. Enter a Mode of TL. 4. Click the Advanced tab. 5. Enter an Itinerary ID of AZ-CA MULTISTOP. 6. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Buy Shipments results page. 7. Mark the check box next to the shipment. If there is more than one shipment, click the ID of the shipment with the highest sequential number. 8. Click View at the top of the page. OTM displays the Shipment View page. 9. Scroll to the bottom of the page. Note the location with a stop number of 3. It should be LOS ANGELES STORE LOS ANGELES CA 90043. 10. Click Actions > Shipment Management > Change Shipment Stops > Resequence Stops. 11. Click the option button next to stop number 3. 12. Click Move Up. 13. Click Ok. 14. From the Resequence Stops page under the Affected Shipment header, click the ID for the shipment. 15. Scroll to Shipment Stops section at the bottom of the page. Note the location with a stop number of 3. It should now be SAN DIEGO STORE SAN DIEGO CA 92101. 16. Close the Buy Shipment view page. 17. Close the Resequence Stops page.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Re-sequencing Stops Chapter 1 - Page 224

a

Practice 1 - Re-sequencing Stops

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Re-sequencing Stops Original Planned Shipment San Diego General Store

Phoenix DC

Los Angeles General Store

Shipment after Re-sequenced Stops Los Angeles General Store

Phoenix DC

San Diego General Store

s ) ha

In this practice, you have been notified that the Los Angeles store has dipped into their safety stock of chocolate cookies, and they need their delivery as soon as possible to replenish their inventory. You need to re-sequence the stops so that the Los Angeles store is the first destination stop. Click Shipment Management > Shipment Management > Buy Shipments. OTM displays the Shipment tab of the buy shipment search page. Click the Transport tab. OTM displays the Transport tab. Enter a Mode of TL. Click the Advanced tab. OTM displays the Advanced tab. Enter an Itinerary ID of AZ-CA MULTISTOP. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Buy Shipments results page. Mark the check box next to the shipment. Click View at the top of the page. OTM displays the Buy Shipment view page. Scroll to the bottom of the page to view the shipment stops.

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid 1. @ t ut dent m i th Stu 2. n a ulik e this h ฺ 3. ik o us h t r 4. a se t k ( tt cen u m li i 5. h e t l an erab 6. k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h 7. t r a no 8.

9.

Question

Enter Your Answers…

How many stops are on this shipment? What location is currently stop 3? 10. Click Actions > Shipment Management > Change Shipment Stops > Resequence Stops. OTM displays the Resequence Stops page in a new window. 11. Click the option button next to Stop Number 3, LOS ANGELES STORE. 12. Click Move Up. Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Re-sequencing Stops Chapter 1 - Page 225

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Note that the Los Angeles Store has been moved up to stop number 2. 13. Click OK. OTM displays the Shipment – Resequence page. 14. Click the shipment ID under Affected Shipments. OTM displays the Shipment View page in a new window. 15. Scroll to the bottom of the Buy Shipment view page. Question

Enter Your Answers…

What location is currently stop 3? 16. Close the Shipment View page. 17. Close the Shipment – Resequence Stops page.

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

s ) ha

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Re-sequencing Stops Chapter 1 - Page 226

a

Solution – Re-sequencing Stops

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Re-sequencing Stops You successfully re-sequenced the stops so the shipment is now: Los Angeles General Store

Phoenix DC

Question

San Diego General Store

Enter Your Answers…

How many stops are on 3 this shipment? What location is currently stop 3?

Los Angeles Store

om c ฺ le eฺ c a What location is San Diego Store or Guid @ currently stop 3? t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

s ) ha

Question

Enter Your Answers…

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Re-sequencing Stops Chapter 1 - Page 227

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Practice 2 - Tendering Shipments Tendering Shipments 1. Click Shipment Management > Shipment Management > Buy Shipments. OTM displays the Shipment tab of the buy shipments search page. 2. Click the Advanced tab. OTM displays the Advanced tab. 3. Enter an Itinerary ID of AZ-CA MULTISTOP. 4. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Buy Shipments results page. 5. Mark the check box next to each of the shipments. 6. Click Actions > Shipment Management > Tender > Secure Resources. OTM displays the Secure Resources confirmation page. OTM tenders the shipments to the service provider assigned to each shipment. 7. Close the Secure Resources confirmation page. 8. Log out of OTM.

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

s ) ha

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 2 - Tendering Shipments Chapter 1 - Page 228

a

Solution – Tendering Shipments

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

You successfully tendered your TL and LTL shipments to their respective service providers.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Tendering Shipments Chapter 1 - Page 229

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Practice 3 - Declining a Tender as Service Provider Declining a Tender as the Service Provider In this practice, you will log into OTM as the BTT9 service provider. BTT9 cannot handle this shipment and will decline the tender. OTM then re-tenders to the next best service provider. 1. Log in to OTM as SERVPROV.YOURDOMAIN-BTT9 using password CHANGEME. (For example, SERVPROV.CORE102-BTT9.) 2. Click Online Booking/Tendering. OTM displays the tender response search page. 3. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Online Booking/Tendering results page. 4. Click the ID. OTM displays the Online Booking/Tendering page. 5. Write down the following information.

om c ฺ le eฺ Tender Offer Status c a or Guid Respond By @ t ut dent Tender Acceptance m i th Stu Status n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us 6. Click Decline at the bottom of thetpage. h r t aShipment OTM displays the Decline This page. k e ( s n or any other code you prefer. ttCode cofeCPU 7. Enter a Decline Reason u i m l i bottom hthe 8. Click Finished at t le of the page. n b a a r OTM automatically the shipment to another service provider after your first ere-tenders f uoflikservice s choice provider declined. H an kLog out -oftrOTM. i h 9. t ar non

s ) ha

Field

Enter Your Results…

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 3 - Declining a Tender as Service Provider Chapter 1 - Page 230

a

Solution – Declining Tender as Service Provider

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Declining a Tender as the Service Provider You successfully logged into OTM as the BTT9 service provider and declined the tender. Field

Enter Your Results…

Tender Offer Status

OUTSTANDING

Respond By

+2H from tender sent

Tender Acceptance Status

NO RESPONSE

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Declining Tender as Service Provider Chapter 1 - Page 231

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Practice 4 - Viewing the Status of Shipments as Transport Planner Viewing a Message in the OTM Message Center 1. Log in to OTM as YOURDOMAIN.ADMIN. (For example, CORE101.ADMIN.) 2. Click Message Center at the top of the page. OTM displays the Messages search page. 3. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Messages results page. 4. Look for a Message Title saying that the Tender for Shipment BTT9-##### DECLINED. 5. Click the ID to view the message. OTM displays the message. 6. Scroll down to view more of the message.

s ) ha

Viewing the Status of Shipments 7. Click Shipment Management > Shipment Management > Buy Shipments. OTM displays the buy shipment search page. 8. Click the Order Base tab. OTM displays the Order Base tab. 9. Enter an Order Base ID of MULTI. 10. Click l (list) next to Order Base ID. OTM displays the Order Bases results page. 11. Mark the check boxes next to the three order bases you just created. 12. Click Finish at the top of the page. OTM returns to the Order Base tab. 13. In the drop-down list to the right of Order Base ID, select a Conditional Operator of One Of. 14. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Buy Shipments results page. 15. Click the ID of the shipment with a mode of TL (this is the shipment that BTT9 declined). OTM displays the Identification tab. 16. Click Status on the right side of the page near the top. OTM displays the Statuses page. • Note the status type of SECURE RESOURCES. • The Status Value should still be SECURE RESOURCES_TENDERED since OTM automatically re-tendered the shipment to another service provider when the tender was declined. 17. Close the Statuses page. 18. Note the following:

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Field

Enter Your Results…

Shipment ID Service Provider (Identification tab) Reference Number Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 4 - Viewing the Status of Shipments as Transport Planner Chapter 1 - Page 232

a

(Qualifier=BM) Total Actual Cost (Financials tab)

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Planned Cost

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 4 - Viewing the Status of Shipments as Transport Planner Chapter 1 - Page 233

a

Solution – Viewing the Status of Shipments as Transport Planner

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Viewing the Status of Shipments You successfully viewed the status of your shipments. Field

Enter Your Results…

Shipment ID

Nnnnn

Service Provider

ATL9

Reference Number (Qualifier=BM)

ATL9-nnnnnn

Total Actual Cost (Financials tab)

650.00 USD

Planned Cost

705.00 USD

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

s ) ha

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Viewing the Status of Shipments as Transport Planner Chapter 1 - Page 234

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Practice 5 - Accepting Tenders and Viewing Shipment Status Accepting Tenders as the Transport Planner 1. From the Shipment edit page, click Actions > Shipment Management > Tender > Accept Tender. OTM displays the Accept This Shipment page. 2. Note the Pickup Date Time. 3. Click Finished at the bottom of the page. OTM displays a confirmation page. 4. Close the Accept Tender page. Viewing the Status of Shipments as the Transport Planner 5. Click Shipment Management > Shipment Management > Buy Shipments. 6. Click the Order Base tab. 7. Enter an Order Base ID of MULTISTOP1. 8. Click Search at the bottom of the page. Note the color of the indicator next to the TL shipment. It should now be green, since the tender has been accepted. This indicator was set by the automation agent previously created. 9. Look for the Status column and note the status is now set to SECURE RESOURCES_ACCEPTED.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 5 - Accepting Tenders and Viewing Shipment Status Chapter 1 - Page 235

a

Solution – Accepting Tenders and Viewing Shipment Status

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Accepting Tenders as the Transport Planner As the transport planner, you successfully accepted the shipment tender. Viewing the Status of Shipments as the Transport Planner You noted the indicator color is set to green and viewed the shipment status of SECURE RESOURCES_ACCEPTED.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Accepting Tenders and Viewing Shipment Status Chapter 1 - Page 236

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Lesson 36: Business Scenario: Building a Multi-leg Shipment

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 36: Business Scenario: Building a Multi-leg Shipment Chapter 1 - Page 237

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Lesson 37: Viewing Public Data

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 37: Viewing Public Data Chapter 1 - Page 238

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Public Locations Viewing a Public Location 1. Click on Shipment Management > Location Manager. 2. Enter a Location Name of BREMERHAVEN. 3. Select the conditional operator of Contains. 4. Enter a Domain Name of PUBLIC. 5. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Locations results page. 6. Click the ID of DEBRV. When you view the details or try to edit a public location, the view page is displayed. This page cannot be edited, only viewed.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Public Locations Chapter 1 - Page 239

a

Practice 1 - Viewing Public Locations

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Viewing a Shared Location Let’s check that you can access the location which is in a domain called SHAREDCORE to which you have read only access. Question

Enter Your Answers…

What is the fixed stop time of the location WARSAW PLANT? (Hint: Search for a Location ID of WARSAW PLANT)

s ) ha

Querying for Public Locations Next, let’s look for some information on locations located in the PUBLIC domain. 1. Click on Shipment Management > Location Manager. OTM displays the location search page. 2. Enter a Location Name of BREMERHAVEN. 3. Select the conditional operator of Contains. 4. Enter a Domain Name of PUBLIC. 5. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Locations results page. You will be using the DEBRV location. If you are unable to find this location, please notify your trainer.

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l Querying for Public Locations an erab k i l f Enter This Data… u nField s H ra ikLocation tName HOUSTON h t n r o a n Conditional Operator

Contains

Domain Name

PUBLIC

OTM displays the results page. You will be using the USHOU location. If you are unable to find this location, please notify your trainer.

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Viewing Public Locations Chapter 1 - Page 240

a

Solution – Viewing Public Locations

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Viewing a Location You successfully determined the fixed stop time. Question

Enter Your Answers…

What is the fixed stop time of the location WARSAW PLANT?

1H

You successfully viewed both the PUBLIC DEBRV and USHOU locations.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Viewing Public Locations Chapter 1 - Page 241

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Lesson 38: Viewing Items

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 38: Viewing Items Chapter 1 - Page 242

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Practice 1 - Viewing Items Querying for Shared Items 1. Click on Order Management > Material Management > Item. OTM displays the Items search page. 2. Enter an Item ID of T SHIRTS. 3. Select the conditional operator of Contains. 4. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Items results page. You will be using the T SHIRTS item. If you are unable to find this item, please notify your trainer. 5. Click New Query. OTM displays the Items search page. 6. Enter an Item ID of SHORTS. 7. Select the conditional operator of Contains. 8. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Items results page. You will be using the SHORTS item. If you are unable to find this item, please notify your trainer. 9. Click New Query. OTM displays the Items search page. 10. Enter an Item ID of SOCKS. 11. Select the conditional operator of Contains. 12. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Items results page. You will be using the SOCKS item. If you are unable to find this item, please notify your trainer.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Viewing Items Chapter 1 - Page 243

a

Solution – Viewing Items

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Viewing Items You successfully viewed the T SHIRTS, SHORTS, and SOCKS items located in the SHAREDCORE domain.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Viewing Items Chapter 1 - Page 244

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Lesson 39: Viewing Equipment Groups and Equipment Group Profiles for Ocean

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 39: Viewing Equipment Groups and Equipment Group Profiles for Ocean Chapter 1 - Page 245

a

Practice 1 - Viewing Equipment Groups and Equipment Group Profiles for Ocean

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Verifying Equipment Group and Equipment Group Profile Question

Enter Your Answers…

What is the effective weight of the Equipment Group 40FT OCEAN CONTAINER? (Hint: Go to Shipment Management > Equipment Management > Equipment Group.) What equipment groups are part of the Equipment Group Profile 40 OCEAN COMPATIBLE?

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t (Hint: Go to Shipment ut dent m i Management > Equipment th Stu n Management > Equipment a Group Profile.) ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

s ) ha

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Viewing Equipment Groups and Equipment Group Profiles for Ocean Chapter 1 - Page 246

a

Solution – Viewing Equipment Groups and Equipment Group Profiles for Ocean

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Verifying Equipment Group and Equipment Group Profile You successfully verified the following equipment: Question

Enter Your Answers…

What is the effective weight of the Equipment Group 40FT OCEAN CONTAINER?

44000.00 LB

What equipment groups are part of the Equipment Group Profile 40 OCEAN COMPATIBLE?

40FT OCEAN CONTAINER

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

s ) ha

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Viewing Equipment Groups and Equipment Group Profiles for Ocean Chapter 1 - Page 247

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Lesson 40: Viewing Service Providers and Rate Offerings for Truckload Leg One

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 40: Viewing Service Providers and Rate Offerings for Truckload Leg One Chapter 1 - Page 248

a

Practice 1 - Viewing Service Providers and Rate Offerings for Truckload Leg One

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Verifying Service Provider and Rates Question

Enter Your Answers…

What is the Corporation ID for the service provider BIS9? (Go to Contract and Rate Management > Service Provider Manager. Then search for BIS9 to view it.) What is the response time when tendering to BIS9? (Go to Business Process Automation > Communication Management > Contacts. Then search on the BIS9 contact and view it.)

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i In what currency is the BIS9 th Stu n TL Rate Offering defined? a ulik e this (View the rate offering to h ฺ ik o us determine the currency) h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

s ) ha

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Viewing Service Providers and Rate Offerings for Truckload Leg One Chapter 1 - Page 249

a

Solution – Viewing Service Providers and Rate Offerings for Truckload Leg One

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Verifying Service Provider and Rates Question

Enter Your Answers…

What is the Corporation ID for BIS9?

BISON TRUCK COMPANY

What is the response time when tendering to BIS9?

2 H (hours)

In what currency is the BIS9 TL Rate Offering defined?

EUR

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Viewing Service Providers and Rate Offerings for Truckload Leg One Chapter 1 - Page 250

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Lesson 41: Creating Rate Offerings and Rate Records for Vessel

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 41: Creating Rate Offerings and Rate Records for Vessel Chapter 1 - Page 251

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Rate Offering and Rate Records for Vessel Viewing a Vessel Rate Offering Vessel rate offerings and rate records are set up similarly to other modes. One difference on the rate offering is the rate service or how transit time is calculated. Vessel rates use voyage schedules that you define in OTM. 1. Click Contract and Rate Management > Contract Management > Rate Offering. 2. Enter a Rate Offering ID of ACLU VESSEL. 3. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Rate Offering results page. 4. Click the ID. The following information was entered when the rate offering was created: • Note the Offering Type of VESSEL • Note the Transport Mode of VESSEL-CO 5. Click v (view) next to the Rate Service ID. • Note the Rate Service Type. In the rate service, you refer to a rate service type which in this example is VOYAGESCHEDULE. Your voyage schedules also refer to this rate service type linking your voyage schedules to your rate service. • Note the Voyage Service Type ID. In the rate service, you also define the associated voyage service type which in this example is TAS-2. This voyage service type links to the voyage schedule in the Voyage Manager. 6. Close the Rate Service page. 7. Click Operational Planning > Schedule Management > Voyage. 8. Enter a Voyage Service Type ID of TAS-2. 9. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Voyages results page. Note the Voyage Service Type ID which links this schedule to any rate service that also uses this voyage service type ID. 10. Click on any of the IDs. • Note the Vessel ID. You can associate a specific vessel to this voyage, for example, vessel ID of SS FREIGHTER. • The voyage defines the origin(s) and destination(s) for the TAS-2 service type. In this example, the location of DEBRV (Bremerhaven) has an activity of Depart which makes it the origin. The location of USHOU (Houston) has an activity of Arrive which makes it the destination. • Note the Activity Date for each location. The activity date specifies when the vessel will arrive or depart at the location that you specified. OTM evaluates this date during shipment planning to determine whether a voyage schedule can be used to build a shipment. When a shipment is created, the activity date determines the shipment stop dates/times. • You can define cutoff and recovery times (load and unload times) for the ocean move in Shipment Management > Power Data > Location > Cutoff Recovery Times. − Deliveries need to be brought to the origin port a certain amount of time prior to a voyage. This is known as cutoff time.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Rate Offering and Rate Records for Vessel Chapter 1 - Page 252

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

− If the delivery does not arrive at the port before the cutoff time, it cannot be accepted on the ship. − There is a certain amount of time that the delivery must wait at the destination before it is ready. This is known as the recovery time. Viewing a Vessel Rate Record One way vessel carriers quote their rates is per container. No matter how the rates are quoted, they are defined on the rate record. 11. Click Contract and Rate Management > Contract Management > Rate Record. 12. Enter a Rate Record ID of ACLU DEU-USA. 13. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Rate Records results page. 14. Click the ID. 15. Click the Rate Costs tab. 16. Click Edit (pencil icon) to the right of the Description field. • This example shows a rate cost based on shipment total pieces of equipment as the basis with a unit of 1. • So the actual rate cost is 545.00 USD per shipment total pieces of equipment of 1.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Rate Offering and Rate Records for Vessel Chapter 1 - Page 253

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Practice 1 - Creating a Rate Offering for Vessel Verifying the Service Provider The service provider Atlantic Commerce Line Unlimited is public data. Query on the public service provider ACLU. 1. Click Contract and Rate Management > Service Provider Manager. 2. Enter a Service Provider ID of ACLU. 3. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the results page. You will be using the ACLU service provider. If you are unable to find this service provider, please notify your trainer. Creating a Vessel Rate Offering Next, create a vessel rate offering with the following information: 4. Click Contract and Rate Management > Contract Management > Rate Offering. 5. Click New at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Rate Header tab. 6. Enter an Offering ID of ACLU VESSEL. 7. Select an Offering Type of VESSEL. 8. Enter a Service Provider ID of ACLU. As soon as you click anywhere else on the page, the page refreshes. 9. Click n (new) next to the Rate Service ID. OTM displays the Rate Service Header tab. 10. Enter a Rate Service ID of VOYAGE SERVICE. 11. Select a Rate Service Type of VOYAGESCHEDULE. 12. Click Details at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Rate Service Details tab. 13. Enter a Voyage Service Type ID of TAS-2. 14. Click Save to the right of the Voyage Service Type ID field. 15. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM returns to the Rate Header tab. 16. Select a Transport Mode of VESSEL-CO. 17. Select a Perspective of Buy. 18. Enter a Version of UNTIL 2018. 19. Click Attributes at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Attributes tab. 20. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM displays the confirmation page.

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

s ) ha

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Creating a Rate Offering for Vessel Chapter 1 - Page 254

a

Solution – Creating a Rate Offering for Vessel

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

You successfully created a vessel rate offering with an ID of ACLU VESSEL and a rate service with an ID of VOYAGE SERVICE.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Creating a Rate Offering for Vessel Chapter 1 - Page 255

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Practice 2 - Creating a Rate Record for Vessel Creating a Vessel Rate Record Create a vessel rate record with the following information. This rate is 545.00 USD per container. 1. From the confirmation page that you saw in practice 1, mark the check box next to the rate offering you just created. 2. Click Actions > Contract and Rate > Change Rates > Create Rate Record. OTM displays the Lane Info tab and populates the Rate Offering ID field. 3. Enter a Rate Record ID of ACLU DEU-USA. 4. Select a Source Geo Hierarchy of LOCATION. 5. Select a Destination Geo Hierarchy of LOCATION. 6. Click Attributes at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Attributes tab. 7. Enter a Source Geography Location ID of DEBRV. 8. Enter a Destination Geography Location ID of USHOU. 9. Click Rate Costs at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Rate Costs tab. 10. Click Add A Cost near the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Rates page. 11. Make sure that a Cost Type of Charge is selected. Charge should be the default cost type. 12. Enter an Amount of 545.00 USD. 13. From the Basis drop-down list, select Shipment Total Pieces of Equipment. 14. Enter a Unit of 1. 15. Click Save at the bottom of the page. OTM returns to the Rate Costs tab. 16. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM displays the confirmation page. 17. Close the confirmation page.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 2 - Creating a Rate Record for Vessel Chapter 1 - Page 256

a

Solution – Creating a Rate Record for Vessel

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

You successfully created a rate record with an ID of ACLU DEU-USA.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Creating a Rate Record for Vessel Chapter 1 - Page 257

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Lesson 42: Defining Accessorials and Special Services

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 42: Defining Accessorials and Special Services Chapter 1 - Page 258

a

Guided Demonstration 1 - Defining Accessorials or Special Services

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Accessorials and special services can be requested on the location, order base, order release, and item. They can also be requested on asset management objects like driver, power unit, etc. Refer to the online help for using accessorials with asset management or Fleet Management. Viewing on a Location First, let’s look at requesting accessorials and special services on a location. 1. Click Shipment Management > Location Manager. 2. Enter a Location ID of PHOENIX DC. 3. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Locations results page. 4. Click the ID. 5. Click the Roles tab. At the bottom of the Roles tab, you can define accessorials and/or special services.

om c ฺ le eฺ Viewing on an Order Base c a or base. uid Next, let’s look at requesting accessorials and special services on an order @ G t ut dent 6. Click Order Management > Purchase Order > Order Base. m i th Stu 7. Enter an Order Base ID of MULTISTOP1. n a 8. Click Search at the bottom of the page. lik this u h ฺ e OTM displays the Order Bases results page. k s i u h 9. Click the ID. art se to k ( 10. Click the Other Attributes tt tab. cen u m li tab, you can define accessorials and/or special i OtherleAttributes At the bottom ofh the t services. an ab r k i l e f u an Order s Release Hon n Viewing a k r i -t at requesting accessorials and special services on an order release. th let’sonlook rNext, a n K

s ) ha

11. Click Order Management > Order Release > Order Release. 12. Enter an Order Release ID of MULTISTOP1. 13. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Order Releases results page. 14. Click the ID. 15. Click the Other Attributes tab. • At the bottom of the Other Attributes tab, you can define accessorials and/or special services. • You can specify a special service group, duration, and source/destination location. These fields are reviewed in more detail in Guided Demonstration 3: Defining Special Services.

Viewing on an Item Finally, let’s look at requesting accessorials and special services on an item. 16. Click Order Management > Material Management > Item. Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Defining Accessorials or Special Services Chapter 1 - Page 259

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

17. Enter an Item ID of CRACKERS. 18. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Items results page. 19. Click the ID. 20. Click the Accessorials tab. On the Accessorials tab, you can define accessorials and/or special services.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Defining Accessorials or Special Services Chapter 1 - Page 260

a

Guided Demonstration 2 - Defining Accessorials

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

You can define accessorial costs on the rate offering or rate record. Here, you view the terminal handling accessorial charge on the rate record. Viewing the Accessorial Code 1. Click Contract and Rate Management > Contract Management > Rate Record. 2. Enter a Rate Record ID of ACLU DEU-USA. 3. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Rate Records results page. 4. Click the ID. 5. Click the Accessorials tab. On the Accessorials tab, you define both accessorial codes and accessorial costs. 6. Click the Accessorial Code ID of TERM HNDLG. OTM displays the Accessorial Code view page. 7. Click Edit at the top of the page. • Note the Accessorial Code ID. When defining an accessorial, you first define the accessorial code. • Note the Flow Thru check box. If you mark the Flow Thru check box and a buy shipment uses this accessorial, OTM also passes on the accessorial to the sell shipment to impact customer billing. In this instance, the accessorial cost applies to both the payment invoice and the customer bill. This way, you can pass on an accessorial charge to a customer without adding an additional fee. • Note the Always Apply check box. If you mark the Always Apply check box, OTM always applies the accessorial code without you having to request the accessorial code on an item, order base, order release, or location. • Note the VAT Exempt check box. Mark the VAT Exempt check box if the accessorial is tax exempt. 8. Click Finished at the top of the page. 9. Close the confirmation page.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Viewing the Accessorial Cost Next, you define the cost associated with the terminal handling charge accessorial. There are several constraints you can assign to the accessorial cost including effective dates and calendars. The terminal handling charge in this example is 120.00 USD per piece of equipment. 10. Click the Accessorial Cost ID of TH. OTM displays the Accessorial Cost view page. 11. Click Edit at the top of the page. The Accessorial Cost page is very similar to the Rate Cost page. In this example, the following information is entered in the Accessorial Cost page: • Accessorial Cost ID of TH. • Cost Type of Charge is specified. • Amount of 120.00 USD. • Basis of Shipment Total Pieces of Equipment. • Unit of 1. Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 2 - Defining Accessorials Chapter 1 - Page 261

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

This example shows an additional cost of 120.00 USD per piece of equipment. 12. Close the Accessorial Cost page.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 2 - Defining Accessorials Chapter 1 - Page 262

a

Guided Demonstration 3 - Defining Special Services

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Now that you have learned about defining accessorials, let’s look at defining special services. In this example, assign the special service to a rate record. Viewing the Special Services Code 1. Click Contract and Rate Management > Contract Management > Rate Record. 2. Enter a Rate Record ID of ACLU. 3. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Rate Records results page. 4. Click the ID of ACLU DEU-USA. 5. Click the Special Services tab. If there is a cost associated with your special service, you define an accessorial code and an accessorial cost for that special service. 6. Click New Special Service. OTM displays the Rate Record / Special Service Edit page. 7. Click n (new) next to Special Service. OTM displays the Special Service page in a new window. • Note the Special Service ID. If the service provider offers this special service as part of the base charge, you only need a special service ID. • Note the Special Service Desc. If you record a special service description, it appears as the shipment cost type on the Financials tab of the Shipment Manager when this special service is applied to a shipment. • Note the Arbitrary check box. Select the Arbitrary check box to indicate that the special service is for tracking an ocean arbitrary. The Special Service page contains many fields used with Oracle Fleet Management. This OTM 6.3 Core Competence class does not include details on the Oracle Fleet Management module. Please refer to the see the Oracle Transportation Management 6.0 Transfer of Information Functional Overview - Special Services and Remarks .and the OTM online help for details about these sections of the page. 8. Close the Special Service page.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 3 - Defining Special Services Chapter 1 - Page 263

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Practice 1 - Defining Accessorials on a Rate Record Defining an Accessorial on a Rate Record Define a 120.00 USD terminal handling accessorial charge per container on the vessel rate record that you created previously. 1. Click Contract and Rate Management > Contract Management > Rate Record. 2. Enter a Rate Record ID of ACLU DEU-USA. 3. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Rate Records results page. 4. Click the ID. OTM displays the Lane Info tab. 5. Click the Accessorials tab. 6. Click n (new) next to Accessorial Code ID. OTM displays the Accessorial Code page. 7. Enter an Accessorial Code ID of TERM HNDLG. 8. Enter an Accessorial Code Description of TERM HANDLING. 9. Mark the Always Apply check box. 10. Click Finished at the top of the Accessorial Code page. OTM returns to the Accessorials tab and adds the new accessorial to the Accessorial Code ID field. 11. Click n (new) next to Accessorial Cost ID. OTM displays the Accessorial Cost page. 12. Enter an Accessorial Cost ID of TH. 13. Make sure a Cost Type of Charge is selected. 14. Enter an Amount of 120.00 USD. 15. From the Basis drop-down list, select Shipment Total Pieces of Equipment. 16. Enter a Unit of 1. 17. Click Finished at the top of the Accessorial Cost page. OTM returns to the Accessorials tab and adds the new accessorial to the Accessorial Cost ID field. 18. Click Save to the right of the Accessorial Cost ID field. OTM displays a message regarding sharing accessorial costs across rates. 19. Click OK. 20. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM displays the confirmation page.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Defining Accessorials on a Rate Record Chapter 1 - Page 264

a

Solution – Defining Accessorials on a Rate Record

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

You successfully defined an accessorial on the ACLU DEU-USA rate record.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Defining Accessorials on a Rate Record Chapter 1 - Page 265

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Lesson 43: Viewing Rate Offerings and Rate Records for the Final Truckload Leg

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 43: Viewing Rate Offerings and Rate Records for the Final Truckload Leg Chapter 1 - Page 266

a

Practice 1 - Viewing Service Providers and Rate Offerings for the Final Truckload Leg

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Verifying Service Provider and Rates Question

Enter Your Answers…

What is the response time when tendering to COY9? (Go to Business Process Automation > Communication Management > Contacts. Then search on the COY9 contact and view it.) In what currency is the COY9 TL Rate Offering defined? (View the rate offering to determine the currency)

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

s ) ha

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Viewing Service Providers and Rate Offerings for the Final Truckload Leg Chapter 1 - Page 267

a

Solution – Viewing Service Providers and Rate Offerings for the Final Truckload Leg

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Verifying Service Provider and Rates Question

Enter Your Answers…

What is the response time when tendering to COY9?

2 H (hours)

In what currency is the COY9 TL Rate Offering defined?

USD

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Viewing Service Providers and Rate Offerings for the Final Truckload Leg Chapter 1 - Page 268

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Lesson 44: Querying for Truckload and Vessel Rates

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 44: Querying for Truckload and Vessel Rates Chapter 1 - Page 269

a

Practice 1 - Querying for Truckload and Vessel Rates

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Running a Truckload Rate Query Field

Enter This Data…

Find

Rates

Date Deliver By

Today's date plus 3 months

Ship From Location ID

WARSAW PLANT

Ship to Location ID

DEBRV

Transport Handling Unit

LARGE BOX

Ship Unit Count

1

Weight

15000 KG

Volume

1 CU FT

Click

Save to the right of the Commodities grid.

om c ฺ le eฺ c Click Search a or Guid OTM should return your BIS9 rate. @ t ut dent Enter the results of the rate query below: m i th YourSResults… tu n Field Enter a ulik e this h Rate Offering ID ฺ ik o us h t r Rate Record a se t k ( tt cen Mode u m li i e Cost nth l a erab k i l This was f entered u cost s H n as 400 EUR. Why is the a k r i t h t ar noncost different?

s ) ha

K

Running a Vessel Rate Query Field

Enter This Data…

Find

Rates

Date Deliver By

Today's date plus 3 months

Ship From Location ID

DEBRV

Ship to Location ID

USHOU

Transport Handling Unit

LARGE BOX

Ship Unit Count

1

Weight

15000 KG

Volume

1 CU FT

Click

Save to right of Commodities grid. Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Querying for Truckload and Vessel Rates Chapter 1 - Page 270

a

Click

Search

OTM should return your ACLU rate. Enter the results of the rate query below:

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Field

Enter Your Results…

Rate Offering ID Rate Record Mode Cost

Running a Second Truckload Rate Query Field

s ) ha

Enter This Data…

om c ฺ Date Deliver By Today's date plus 3 months le eฺ c a or Guid Ship From Location ID USHOU @ t ut dent Ship to Location ID SACRAMENTO m i th Stu Transport Handling Unit LARGE BOX an ulik e this Ship Unit Count 1 h ฺ ik LBo us h t Weight 30000 r a se t k ( tt ce1 nCU FT Volume u m li Save to right of Commodities grid. i e Click th l an erab k i l Click Search u nsf H ikshould OTM return tra your Coyote Carrier truckload rate. h t n r a Enter ntheoresults of the rate query below: Find

Rates

K

Field

Enter Your Results…

Rate Offering ID Rate Record Mode Cost

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Querying for Truckload and Vessel Rates Chapter 1 - Page 271

a

Solution – Querying for Truckload and Vessel Rates You successfully ran rate queries for truckload and vessel rates.

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Running a Truckload Rate Query Field

Enter Your Results…

Rate Offering ID

BIS9 TL

Rate Record ID

BIS9 POL-DEU

Transport Mode

TL

Cost

Varies with exchange rate but roughly USD 394.28

This cost was entered as 400 EUR. Why is the cost different?

User preferences tell OTM to display in USD.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a Enter Your Results… or Guid @ t Rate Offering ID ACLU VESSEL ut dent m i Rate Record ID ACLU DEU-USA th tu n S a Mode VESSEL-CO ulik e this h ฺ ik USD Cost 665.00 us h t r o t (ka nse t t u lice m i Running a Truckload Rate h bQuery t le n a a Field Enter Your Results… lik sfer u H RateraOffering n ID COY9 TL k i t h t COY9 HOU-SAC ar nonRate Record ID Running a Vessel Rate Query Field

K

Mode

TL

Cost

986.00 USD

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Querying for Truckload and Vessel Rates Chapter 1 - Page 272

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Lesson 45: Creating Multi-leg Itineraries

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 45: Creating Multi-leg Itineraries Chapter 1 - Page 273

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Itinerary Leg Details for a Multi-leg Itinerary Viewing a Multi-leg Itinerary 1. Click Shipment Management > Itinerary Management > Itinerary Manager. 2. Enter an Itinerary ID of POLAND. 3. Click Search at the bottom of the page. 4. Click the ID. • Note the Parameters tab. When you define a multi-leg itinerary in OTM, both the Parameters tab and the Lane Definitions tab are similar to other itineraries. The difference is in how you define the legs. • For direct, multi-stop, and multi-leg shipments, you define the source and destination at the high level on the Parameters tab. • For a multi-stop shipment, you also mark the Multi-Stop Itinerary check box. 5. Click the Lane Definitions tab. For direct, multi-stop, and multi-leg shipments, you enter details on the source and destination locations based on data you entered previously in the Parameters tab. For example, on the Parameters tab, you entered a source geo hierarchy of COUNTRY. On the Land Definition tab, OTM requires you to enter a source geography country code ID. 6. Click the List Legs tab. • For direct and multi-stop shipments, you enter one leg defining equipment and mode details. • For multi-leg shipments, you define each leg of the shipment with associated information such as equipment, assignment type, sequence, and priority. 7. Click edit (the pencil icon) to the right of the leg with a Sequence Number of 1. • Note that this is the first leg; therefore, the Sequence Number is 1. • Note the Equipment Assignment Type of Optimize Equipment. • Note the Location Role of PORT. • Note the Location ID of DEBRV. In this example, the first leg ends at the port of DEBRV. • Note the Mode Profile ID of TL. • Note the Equipment Group Profile ID is 40 OCEAN CONTAINER. 8. Click Save at the bottom of the page. 9. Click edit (the pencil icon) to the right of the leg with a Sequence Number of 2. • Note the Sequence Number is 2 because this is the second leg. • Note the Primary check box is marked. OTM applies order release constraints to primary legs. • Note the Equipment Assignment Type of Re-use Equipment. • Note the Location Role of PORT. • Note the Location ID of USHOU. In this example, the second leg ends at the port of USHOU. • Note the Mode Profile ID. The mode for this leg is Vessel – CO which stands for vessel container.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Itinerary Leg Details for a Multi-leg Itinerary Chapter 1 - Page 274

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

• Note the Equipment Group Profile ID is 40 OCEAN CONTAINER. 10. Click Save at the bottom of the page. 11. Click edit (the pencil icon) to the right of the leg with a Sequence Number of 3. • For the last leg to the final destination, the Sequence Number is 3. • Note the Equipment Assignment Type of Re-use Equipment. • Note the Location Role and Location ID are blank. On the final leg, you do not need to define a location role or location ID since this is specified as the destination location on the Lane Definition tab. • Note the Mode Profile ID. The mode for this leg is TL. • Note the Equipment Group Profile ID is 40 OCEAN CONTAINER. 12. Click Save at the bottom of the page. • After entering all leg information, the List Legs tab displays the leg ID, leg name, sequence number, destination location, service provider profile ID, and mode profile ID. • Note the Leg ID which is a unique identifier generated by OTM. • Note the Service Provider Profile ID. You can enter a service provider profile ID to force OTM to use certain service provider(s) on the leg.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Itinerary Leg Details for a Multi-leg Itinerary Chapter 1 - Page 275

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Practice 1 - Creating a Multi-leg Itinerary Creating a Multi-leg Itinerary 1. Click Shipment Management > Itinerary Management > Itinerary Manager. 2. Click New at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Parameters tab. 3. Enter an Itinerary ID of POLAND CA MULTILEG. 4. Select a Perspective of Buy. 5. Select the Itinerary Type of Active. 6. Select a Source Geo Hierarchy of COUNTRY. 7. Select a Destination Geo Hierarchy of STATE/PROVINCE. 8. Click Lane Definitions at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Lane Definitions tab. 9. Enter the Source Geography Country Code ID of POL. 10. Enter the Destination Geography Province Code of CA. 11. Click List Legs. OTM displays the List Legs tab. 12. Click New Leg. OTM displays the Leg page. 13. Enter a Sequence Number of 1. 14. Select the Equipment Assignment Type of Optimize Equipment. 15. Select the Location Role of PORT. 16. Enter a Location ID of DEBRV. 17. Select the Mode Profile ID of TL. 18. Enter an Equipment Group Profile ID of 40 OCEAN COMPATIBLE (already created). 19. Click Save at the bottom of the page. OTM returns to the List Legs tab and the first leg has been added to the page. 20. Click New Leg. OTM displays the Leg page. 21. Enter a Sequence Number of 2. 22. Mark the Primary check box. 23. Select the Equipment Assignment Type of Re-use Equipment. 24. Select the Location Role of PORT. 25. Enter a Location ID of USHOU. 26. Select the Mode Profile ID of VESSEL-CO. 27. Enter an Equipment Group Profile ID of 40 OCEAN COMPATIBLE (already created). 28. Click Save at the bottom of the page. OTM returns to the List Legs tab and the second leg has been added to the page. 29. Click New Leg. OTM displays the Leg page. 30. Enter a Sequence Number of 3. 31. Select the Equipment Assignment Type of Re-use Equipment.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Creating a Multi-leg Itinerary Chapter 1 - Page 276

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

32. Select the Mode Profile ID of TL. 33. Enter an Equipment Group Profile ID of 40 OCEAN COMPATIBLE (already created). 34. Click Save at the bottom of the page. OTM returns to the List Legs tab and the final leg has been added to the page. 35. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM displays the confirmation page.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Creating a Multi-leg Itinerary Chapter 1 - Page 277

a

Solution – Creating a Multi-leg Itinerary

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

You successfully created a multi-leg itinerary with an ID of POLAND CA MULTILEG.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Creating a Multi-leg Itinerary Chapter 1 - Page 278

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Lesson 46: Querying for Route and Rates

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 46: Querying for Route and Rates Chapter 1 - Page 279

a

Practice 1 - Querying for Route and Rates Running a Route and Rates Query

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Field

Enter This Data…

Find

Rate and Route

Date Deliver By

Today’s date plus 3 months

Ship From Location ID

WARSAW PLANT

Ship To Location ID

SACRAMENTO

Transport Handling Unit

LARGE BOX

Ship Unit Count

1

Weight

30000 LB

om c ฺ Click Save to the far right of the Commoditiescgrid. le eฺ a or Guid Click Search @ t t ent OTM should return your truckload, vessel, and truckload rate.mu i h Stud t Enter the results of the rate query below: n is Results… ikaEnter l thYour u Field h ฺ e ik o us h Itinerary ID t r ka nse t Total Actual Costtt ( u lice m i Which rate has h anble t n accessorial? lika sfera u H (Click n plus sign to athe k r i t h t ar nonexpand to show the

s ) ha

Volume

K

1 CU FT

costs for each leg. Then click the costs for each leg to determine which one has the accessorial) How much is the accessorial?

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Querying for Route and Rates Chapter 1 - Page 280

a

Solution – Querying for Route and Rates You successfully ran the query for rate and route.

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Running a Rate Query Field

Enter Your Results…

Itinerary ID

POLAND CA MULTILEG

Total Actual Cost

USD 2045.28

Which rate has an accessorial?

ACLU DEU-USA

How much is the accessorial?

USD 120.00

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Querying for Route and Rates Chapter 1 - Page 281

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Lesson 47: Configuring Auto Assignment Rules

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 47: Configuring Auto Assignment Rules Chapter 1 - Page 282

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Auto Assignment Rules Viewing an Auto Assignment Rule 1. Click Business Process Automation > Agents and Milestones > Auto Assignment Rule. 2. Enter an Auto Assignment Rule ID of SAC. 3. Click Search at the bottom of the page. 4. Click the ID. • OTM displays the Header tab of the Auto Assign Rule Manager. • Note the Stop after 1st Assignment check box. Mark the check box to have the rule considered as complete as soon as it writes data. For example, you can create a rule that automatically populates involved party data for any new order base based on specific criteria (that you define on the Criteria tab). • Note the Active check box. • Note the Run on Create check box. Mark the check box to specify that this rule will run when the business object is created. If you leave the check box unmarked, the rule will run only on modification of the business object based on the event specified in the Event field in the rule. • Note the Auto Assign Type ID that defines what data this rule assigns. In this example, OTM assigns an involved party to a new order release. Refer to the OTM online help to see a full list of valid values for this field. • Note the Pre Qual Criteria ID. You can optionally use this section to construct criteria to eliminate a rule from being considered for processing. • Note the Event field. You can map an agent to an auto assignment rule so that, if a business object is changed, the auto assignment rule will run. 5. Click the Criteria tab. Note the Auto Assign Criteria ID. In this example, the involved party assignment is based on the destination of the order release. 6. Click the Definition tab. This rule assigns the SAC_PLANNER as the LOGISTICS involved party when the destination is SACRAMENTO. • Involved Party of SAC PLANNER • Communication Method of BY CONTACT • Involved Party Qualifier of LOGISTICS • Destination Location of SACRAMENTO

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Auto Assignment Rules Chapter 1 - Page 283

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Practice 1 - Configuring Auto Assignment Rules Creating an Auto Assignment Rule You will set up an auto assignment rule that will look for the creation of an order release with a destination location of Sacramento. The rule will add an involved party of SAC PLANNER to the newly created order release. 1. Click Business Process Automation > Agents and Milestones > Auto Assignment Rule. OTM displays the Auto Assignment Rule search tab. 2. Click New at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Header tab. 3. Enter an Auto Assign Rule ID of SAC INV PTY. 4. Select the Auto Assign Type ID of ORDER_RELEASE_INVOLVED_PARTY. 5. Click Criteria at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Criteria tab. 6. Select the Auto Assign Criteria ID of ORDER_DESTINATION. 7. Click Save to the right of the Auto Assign Criteria ID field. 8. Click Definition at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Definition tab. 9. Enter a Seq of 1. 10. Enter an Involved Party of SAC PLANNER. 11. Select a Communication Method of BY CONTACT. 12. Select an Involved Party Qualifier of LOGISTICS. 13. Enter a Destination Location of SACRAMENTO. 14. Click Save to the right of the Destination Location field. 15. Click Save to the right of the Involved Party Qualifier drop-down list. 16. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM displays the confirmation page. 17. Answer the following:

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no Question

Enter Your Answers…

What will happen when an order release is created with the destination of SACRAMENTO?

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Configuring Auto Assignment Rules Chapter 1 - Page 284

a

Solution – Configuring Auto Assignment Rules

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

You successfully created an auto assignment rule with an ID of SAC INV PTY. Creating an Auto Assignment Rule Question What will happen when an order release is created with the destination of SACRAMENTO?

Enter Your Answers… OTM assigns SAC PLANNER as the logistics involved party to the order release.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Configuring Auto Assignment Rules Chapter 1 - Page 285

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Lesson 48: Creating Order Releases

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 48: Creating Order Releases Chapter 1 - Page 286

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Order Releases Viewing an Order Release 1. Click Order Management > Order Release > Order Release. 2. Enter an Order Release ID of POL-CA. 3. Click Search at the bottom of the page. 4. Click the ID. • Note the Splittable check box. Mark the check box to allow splitting of the order. This check box has priority over the Splittable check boxes on the Ship Unit tab. If not marked, the order cannot be split at all. The Splittable check box is marked by default. • Note the Status button. Click Status to display the current status types and status values that are assigned to the order release. You can create your own status types and values that you can assign to an order release. • Note the Priority. Enter a priority if you want to differentiate some order releases as a high, medium or low priority for planning purposes. Valid values are 1-999. The higher the number, the higher the priority. • Note the Order Configuration of ONE_TO_ONE. This means the order release will be based on line items. • Note the Source Location and Destination Location. Similar to an order base you must have a source location and a destination location on your order release. 5. Click the Ship Unit tab. This tab displays the ship units on the order release by transport handling unit (THU) as well as the distribution of packaged items on each THU. 6. Click the Line Item tab. • The Line Item tab displays each line item (packaged item) on the order and its distribution on ship units based on the order configuration and the packaging attributes of the item. • The line item summary page for an order release is different from an order base in that each line item displays the ship units that contain the line item (indented beneath the line item). You can manually enter ship units and their corresponding line items on an order release or you can have OTM calculate the appropriate ship units based on the number of line items and their attributes. 7. Click edit (the pencil icon) to the right of the line item ID POL-CA-001. • This order release line item details page displays the attributes of an order release line item. These are the general attributes for the line item and are not specific to any ship unit. • Many of the attributes that appear here are the same as those that are available on an order base. • Note the Packaged Item ID. • Note the Weight. You can enter your amount in any unit of measure but OTM displays the amount according to your user preferences. 8. Click Save at the bottom of the page. OTM returns to the Line Item tab. 9. Click the Constraints tab.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Order Releases Chapter 1 - Page 287

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

•

OTM provides a variety of constraints that you can place on an order (order-level constraints) or itinerary leg (leg-level) that help you control how orders are bundled and how shipments are created for orders. • If you decide not to use these constraints (itinerary, rate, and service provider), OTM’s optimization engine determines the best choice during the shipment planning process. • The Constraints tab is where you would specify order level constraints such as: − Buy or sell fixed itinerary − Buy or sell rate offering − Equipment − Buy or sell service providers − Rate service − As well as, leg level constraints 10. Click the Involved Parties tab. Note that OTM automatically added the involved party of SAC PLANNER because of the auto assignment rule set up in the previous lesson.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Order Releases Chapter 1 - Page 288

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Practice 1 - Creating Order Releases Reviewing the Business Monitor 1. Click Business Monitor at the top of the page. 2. Enter the results of the Business Monitor below. At the conclusion of the exercise you will review the Business Monitor again to see which queries have changed. Saved Query Name

Enter Your Results…

ORDER BASE-NO RELEASES ORDER RELEASE-NEW SHIPMENT-NEW SHIPMENT-DELAYED

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a Creating an Order Release or Guid @ t 4. Click Order Management > Order Release > Order Release. ut dent m OTM displays the Order Release search tab. i th Stu n 5. Click New at the bottom of the page. a lik this OTM displays the Order Release tab. ฺhu e k s i u 6. Enter an Order Release ID of POL-CA. h to art sedate. 7. Enter an Early Pickup Date(k of today’s tt cen date plus 3 months. u 8. Enter a Late Delivery Date oflitoday’s m i hConfiguration t le of ONE_TO_ONE. 9. Select an Order n b a a ik sLocation er of WARSAW PLANT. 10. Enteru alSource f H an Location of SACRAMENTO. 11. ik Enter a Destination r t h t r nonthe Reference Number Qualifier of PO. Ka 12. Select 3.

Close the Business Monitor page.

13. Enter a Reference Number of 093382. 14. Click Save to the right of the Reference Number field. 15. Click Ship Unit at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Line Item tab. 16. Click New Line Item near the middle of the page. OTM displays the Line Item details page. 17. Enter a Packaged Item ID of SOCKS. 18. Enter a Weight of 4500 KG. 19. Click Save at the bottom of the page. OTM returns to the Line Item tab with your new entry of SOCKS now in the section. 20. Click New Line Item in the middle of the page. OTM displays the Line Item details page. 21. Enter a Packaged Item ID of T SHIRTS. 22. Enter a Weight of 3000 KG. Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Creating Order Releases Chapter 1 - Page 289

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

23. Click Save at the bottom of the page. OTM returns to the Line Item tab with your new entry of T SHIRTS now in the section. 24. Click New Line Item in the middle of the page. OTM displays the Line Item details page. 25. Enter a Packaged Item ID of SHORTS. 26. Enter a Weight of 7500 KG. 27. Click Save at the bottom of the page. OTM returns to the Line Item tab with the three line items displayed. 28. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM displays the confirmation page. 29. From the confirmation page, click Edit. 30. Click the Involved Parties tab. Question

Enter Your Answers…

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a How was this involved party or Guid assigned, since you did not @ t ut dent assign it when entering the m i order? th Stu n a is query has been updated from 31. Click Business Monitor at the top of the page. thsaved ulikWhich h this exercise? ฺ e ik o us h t r Field Enter Your Results… a se t k ( t n Saved Query Name ut e c i m l hi ble t n 32. Close thekBusiness ra page. li a sfeMonitor u H ran k i t arth nonWhat involved party is on the order release?

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Creating Order Releases Chapter 1 - Page 290

a

Solution – Creating Order Releases

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

You successfully reviewed the OTM Business Monitor and created an order release with an ID of POL-CA. Reviewing Business Monitor Saved Query Name

Enter Your Results…

ORDER BASE-NO RELEASES

1 (All of these values can vary if student has deviated from the exercises in any way.) Note: This is an order base in the SHAREDCORE domain that will be used for a demonstration later in the class.

ORDER RELEASE-NEW

0

SHIPMENT-NEW

0

SHIPMENT-DELAYED

1

om c ฺ le eฺ c a Creating an Order Release or Guid @ t t Question Enter Your utAnswers… n e m i h Stud t What involved party is on the SAC PLANNER n order release? ika this l u ฺhAssignment e Rule How was this involved party Auto k s i u h assigned, since you did not art to k e ( assign it when entering the tt cens u order? im le li h t an erab k i l f u nField s Enter Your Results… H a k r i t Name -Query ORDER_RELEASE-NEW n o arth Saved n

s ) ha

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Creating Order Releases Chapter 1 - Page 291

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Lesson 49: Configuring Audit Trail

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 49: Configuring Audit Trail Chapter 1 - Page 292

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Guided Demonstration 1 - Configuring Audit Trail To audit data changes, you must: • Turn auditing on • Turn auditing on for each object you need • Subscribe to changes for those objects Before you can audit any records, you must add at least one contact (per domain) using the Communication Manager. The contact must be assigned the audit (AUD) communication method. Then you can assign the contact to the specific OTM events you want to audit. By default, any user in that domain that is assigned to the DEFAULT level can perform an audit. The OTM Administrator can restrict audit access using the security services options. All audit records are stored in the domain where the contact that has auditing privileges resides. If your OTM installation has multiple domains or sub-domains, you can configure the audit contact to store audit records in a specific domain so that you can audit other domains.

s ) ha

Turning On Auditing Note: You must have the property glog.audit.beforeafter set to on to be able to see changes to each database column. This is turned on for the training server. 1. Click Business Process Automation > Audit Trail Management > Audit Control. 2. Click Search at the bottom of the page. 3. Click the ID. • OTM displays the Audit Control page for your domain. • Here you turn auditing on in general and for specific business objects. • Select a Data Query Type to specify which business object you want to audit. In this example, ORDER RELEASE is selected.

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e Creating an Audit tContact l an Process abAutomation > Communication Manager > Contacts. r k 4. Click Business i l e f sID of PLANNER. Hua Contact n 5. k Enter a r i -t at the bottom of the page. Search n o ar6.th Click n 7. 8.

Click the ID. Click the Notification tab. • At the bottom of the page, note the Subject of ORDER – MODIFIED. The audit trail will be recorded whenever an order is modified. • In the Com Method ID field, note the entry of AUD for auditing. • Note the domain in the Domain Name field that determines where you want to store audit records. This allows users in another domain to perform an audit on the records from your current domain.

Viewing Audited Business Objects You define which business objects to audit in the Notify Subject Manager. In this example, you audit order bases when there is a modification. 9. Click Business Process Automation > Communication Management > Contact Notification. 10. Enter a Contact Notification ID of ORDER - MODIFIED. 11. Click Search at the bottom of the page. Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Configuring Audit Trail Chapter 1 - Page 293

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

12. Click the ID. • OTM displays the Contact Notification manager for the Subject ID of ORDER – MODIFIED. • In the Contacts section, use contact notification to subscribe to the changes you want to audit. • To audit rather than receive notification, use the Communication Method AUD. • In this example, you want to audit orders releases when there is a modification. Viewing the Audit Information Once you have set up auditing, you are able to see audit records in two locations: • Audit Trail Manager • Manger for the OTM business object you want to audit For example, in the Order Release Manager, you could: 13. Click Order Management > Order Release > Order Release. 14. Enter an Order Release ID of POL-CA. 15. Click Search at the bottom of the page. 16. Click the ID. OTM displays the Order Release tab of the Order Manager. 17. Click Edit (the pencil icon) to the right of the Reference Number Qualifier of PO. 18. Change the Reference Number to something else. 19. Click Save to the right of the Reference Number field. 20. Click Finished at the top of the page. OTM displays the confirmation page. 21. Mark the check box on the confirmation page. 22. Click Actions > Order Management > View > Audit Trail. OTM displays the Audit Trail search tab. Here you can limit your audit to a certain time window, a certain user, or certain action. 23. Click Search at the bottom of the page. 24. Click any ID. OTM displays the Audit Trail Entry page. • Here you can see the data that was changed, the user who changed the data, and the time it was changed. • OTM can only populate the Reason section if you have configured OTM to require users to enter a reason when changing data. 25. Close the Audit Trail Entry page.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Configuring Audit Trail Chapter 1 - Page 294

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Lesson 50: Planning a Multi-leg Shipment

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 50: Planning a Multi-leg Shipment Chapter 1 - Page 295

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Practice 1 - Planning Multi-leg Shipments Building Shipments You build a multi-leg shipment from the order release you entered previously. 1. Click Order Management > Order Release > Order Release. OTM displays the Order Release search tab. 2. Enter an Order Release ID of POL-CA. 3. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Order Releases results page. 4. Mark the check box next to your order release. 5. Click Actions at the top of the page. 6. Click Operational Planning > Create Buy Shipment > Direct. OTM displays the Create Direct Shipment / Equipment Prompt page. 7. Click OK without entering any information. OTM displays the confirmation page. 8. Enter the shipment IDs, modes, and service providers.

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a r oProvider uid Shipment ID Mode Service @ G t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ hik to us 9. Close the confirmation page. art (k nse t t u Mapping and Plotting m Shipmentslice i thManagement le > Shipment Management > Buy Shipments. 10. Click Shipment n b a a lik the OTM u displays Buy er Shipment search tab. f s H 11. ik Click the tOrder an Release tab. r h t ar12. Enter nonan Order Release ID of POL-CA.

s ) ha

13. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Buy Shipments results page. 14. Mark the check boxes next to the three shipments just created. 15. Click Actions > Shipment Management > Map > Map Shipments. OTM displays the map with all of your shipments. The multi-leg shipment you just created has three shipments, with each shipment transporting the order from Warsaw, Poland, to Sacramento, CA, USA. The order is moving truckload from Warsaw to Bremerhaven, vessel to Houston, and truckload to Sacramento. 16. What color is the vessel movement? Field

Enter Your Results…

Vessel Mode

17. What color are the TL movements? Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Planning Multi-leg Shipments Chapter 1 - Page 296

a

Field

Enter Your Results…

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

TL Mode

18. Close the map page. 19. On the Buy Shipment results page, click Actions > Shipment Management > View > Plot Related Shipments. OTM displays the plot with all of your shipments. 20. Click Summaries > Cost by Service Provider. 21. How much does the Coyote Carrier (COY9) shipment cost? Field

Enter Your Results…

Shipment Cost

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no 22. Close the Service Provider Facts page. 23. Close the Summaries menu. 24. Close the Related Shipment Plot page.

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Planning Multi-leg Shipments Chapter 1 - Page 297

a

Solution – Planning Multi-leg Shipments OTM successfully built three shipments and you plotted the shipments.

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Creating Shipments Shipment ID

Mode

Service Provider

nnnnn

TL

BIS9

nnnnn

VESSEL-CO

ACLU

nnnnn

TL

COY9

Mapping and Plotting Shipments Field Vessel Mode

Enter Your Results… grayish

om c ฺ le eฺ c a Field Enter Your Results… or Guid @ t TL Mode green ut dent m i th Stu n a is thYour ulik Enter Field Results… h ฺ e k s i u h Shipment Cost toUSD art 986.00 k e ( tt cens u im le li h t an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

s ) ha

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Planning Multi-leg Shipments Chapter 1 - Page 298

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Lesson 51: Viewing Order Movements

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 51: Viewing Order Movements Chapter 1 - Page 299

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Order Movements Viewing Order Movements When you built the multi-leg shipment in the previous practice, OTM automatically created order movements. Let’s review those order movements. 1. Go to Order Management > Order Movement > Order Movement. OTM displays the Order Movement search page. 2. Enter an Order Release ID of POL-CA. 3. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Order Movements results page. • Note that OTM created three order movements. One for each leg of the multi-stop shipment: one for the first TL leg, one for the vessel leg and a third for the final TL leg. 4. Select all three order movements. 5. Click View to view the order movements. 6. Let’s review the first order movement which has an ID of POL-CA-001. • Note the Order Movement ID which is generated by the Business Number Generator and cannot be changed after the order movement is created. • Note the Perspective which identifies whether this is a buy (B) or sell (S) order movement. The perspective is determined by the perspective of the shipment or itinerary depending on how the order movement was created; for example, from an order release or shipment. • Note the Creation Process Type which identifies whether the order movement was created from an order release (SYSTEM-ITINERARY) or from a shipment (SYSTEMACTIONS). • Note the Order Release ID and Shipment ID fields which display the order release from which this order movement was created and the shipment associated with this order movement. • Note the Source and Destination Location ID fields. This specific order movement is from Warsaw to DEBRV, so it represents the first leg in this multi-stop movement. • Note the Early Pickup Date and Late Delivery Date which were copied from the order release. • Note Original Leg Position which is a relative position of the original leg to the primary leg in the itinerary such that a primary leg's position is 0 and positions for legs to left of the primary legs (pre-transport) are -1, -2, etc. Positions for legs after the primary leg are 1, 2, etc. So in our scenario, the second leg of the itinerary, the vessel leg, was marked as primary, so this first leg has an original leg position of -1. • The Total Weight, Total Volume, and Total Ship Unit Count fields are all calculated from the ship units on the order movement. 7. Note the Constraints section. This section gives you the opportunity to create/view/edit additional information about the order movement, including equipment group information, service provider information, rating, and transit time. 8. Note the Ship Units grid. The Ship Unit ID is the shipment ship unit ID and it appears when the order movement is planned on a shipment.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Order Movements Chapter 1 - Page 300

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

9. Click Next to view the second order movement. 10. Note the Order Movement ID of POL-CA-002. 11. Note the Original Leg Position of 0. This is set to 0 because this is the vessel leg which was marked as the primary leg on the itinerary. 12. Note the Source and Destination Location IDs of DEBRV and USHOU. This order movement represents the leg traveling from the port of Bremerhaven to the port of Houston. 13. Click Next to view the final order movement. 14. Note the Order Movement ID of POL-CA-003. 15. Note the Original Leg Position of 1. 16. Note the Source and Destination Location IDs of USHOU and SACRAMENTO. This order movement represents the final leg traveling from the port of Houston to the Sacramento, CA.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing Order Movements Chapter 1 - Page 301

a

Practice 1 - Viewing Order Movements When you built the multi-leg shipment in the previous practice, OTM automatically created order movements. Let’s review those order movements.

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Viewing Order Movements 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Go to Order Management > Order Movement > Order Movement. Enter an Order Release ID of POL-CA. Click Search at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the Order Movements results page. Select all three order movements. Click View to view the order movements. Let’s see what locations the first order movement is traveling between: Field

s ) ha

Value

Order Movement ID

om c ฺ le eฺ c a Destination Location ID or Guid @ t 7. Click Next at the top of the page. ut dent m i 8. Let’s see what locations this second order movementth is traveling tubetween: n S a Field Value ulik e this h ฺ ik o us Order Movement ID h t r a se t k Source Location ID ( tt cen u Destination Location ID m li i h e t l Original k Leg anPosition ab r i l e f s leg Why Huis theraoriginal n k i position tset to 0? arth nonSource Location ID

K

9. Click Next at the top of the page. 10. Let’s see what locations this order movement is going between: Field

Value

Order Movement ID Source Location ID Destination Location ID

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Viewing Order Movements Chapter 1 - Page 302

a

Solution – Viewing Order Movements

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

You successfully viewed the three order movement automatically created by OTM when you planned your order release POL-CA into shipments. For the first order movement: Field

Value

Order Movement ID

POL-CA-001

Source Location ID

WARSAW PLANT

Destination Location ID

DEBRV

Let’s see what locations this order movement is going between: Field

Value

Order Movement ID

POL-CA-002

Source Location ID

DEBRV

Destination Location ID

USHOU

om c ฺ le eฺ c Original Leg Position 0 a or Guid @ Why is the original leg This is the order movement associated t t ent uthat position set to 0? with the vessel movement iand leg m d is h The u t t set to primary on the n itinerary. order S a with the s k movement associated primary i i l h leg of the itinerary ฺhu ualways e t has an original k s i leg rposition th ofto0. a seis going between: Let’s see what locations this torder t (kmovement n e u lic im le Value Field h t an eIDrab POL-CA-003 Order Movement k i l u nsf H Source Location USHOU a ID k r i t h t ar Destination non Location ID SACRAMENTO

s ) ha

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Viewing Order Movements Chapter 1 - Page 303

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Lesson 52: Network Routing

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Lesson 52: Network Routing Chapter 1 - Page 304

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Appendix A: Viewing OTM Log Files

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Appendix A: Viewing OTM Log Files Chapter 1 - Page 305

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing the System Log File Viewing the System Log File 1. Click Order Management > Process Management. You can access the log files from the Process Management page. 2. Under Logs, click System. • Note the From field. You can enter a date and time from which the log you want to view log entries. 3. In the From field, change the time to 1 hour before the current time. • Note the Log drop-down list which contains the following options: − SYSTEM – For logging system events. − WEB – Controls web server logging. These settings control all aspects of web logging including the filename, maximum size, backup count and enabled log IDs. If you modify Web settings via power data, all web servers are notified and retrieve the modified settings on the next servlet use. You can create any number of web log files. Each web log will be written to the web tier, and accessible via the System log viewer. If no Web log exists (or web properties suppress its use), web-tier logging reverts to using properties. − EXCEPTION – Captures any problem that halts execution of an OTM action or workflow. This log includes a trace of the error for technical support purposes. − Note – You may see other logs which are user logs. A user log is a custom log that captures log messages for a specific user. The name of this log varies depending on what it is named when created. You should see the log “Admin” which is a custom log. 4. Select a Log of SYSTEM. • Note the Severities. If you do not select any severities, OTM finds all log entries regardless of severity. You can select one or more severities which include: − Debug – Logs debug messages, including their start and complete times. Note: Log files that record debug messages may reduce your system performance. When running a debug log, carefully select the business processes that it monitors. − Error – Logs error messages for failed or otherwise stopped processes. − Explanation – Logs explanation messages. − Performance – Logs summarized performance information about selected business processes. − Performance Detail – Logs the start and stop times, and other details, of selected business processes. − Warning – Logs warning messages. Warnings occur prior to errors. • Note the IDs. Select one or more IDs of business processes to be logged. Refer to the OTM online help to see a list of all log IDs. • Note Search For field. To find one or more specific log items, type characters in the Search For field. You can search for any log item (for example, a specific order ID, shipment ID, or time stamp). Numbers, letters, and other characters can be entered. • Note the Ignore Case check box. Mark the Ignore Case check box to control casesensitive searches using the Search For field.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing the System Log File Chapter 1 - Page 306

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

•

Note Top Level Process. The field shows an ID for the process that was performed. In most cases, you should leave this field as is unless you are performing a search for a specific process. Then, you would enter the appropriate ID. 5. Ensure the Entries per Page is set to 1000. • Note the Search All Backups check box. If you select the check box, OTM searches all backup files in addition to the current log. To search the current log, do not select this check box. • Note the Save to File check box. If you want to save the results as a file, select this check box. 6. Click View Results at the bottom of the page. The Log Viewer opens. • Note the Time column. This column contains the exact date and time that this corresponding system log entry was written to the log file. The time is pulled from the OTM server and may differ from the time on your workstation. • Note the Process column. Each OTM process, such as, tendering, building a shipment, etc. is given a process ID by OTM. You can search on or look for a specific process ID when troubleshooting. • Note the Severity column. When troubleshooting an issue, look for a severity of Error. • Note the ID column. When troubleshooting an issue, look for an ID of Exception. The ID column corresponds to the log file options that you can set when configuring a log file. IDs often used when troubleshooting including: − Planning − RateEngine − RateService • Note the System Log column. The System Log column contains the actual log file message or details of what OTM was doing. For example, an entry in the System Log column of “[INFEASIBLE] - No base cost calculated. [RACGrid2.costShipment()]” shows that OTM could not find a base cost for a rate and therefore could not create a shipment. 7. Scroll down to the bottom of the log page. 8. Click Next. OTM displays the next page in the log file. 9. Click Previous. OTM displays the previous page in the log file. 10. Scroll down to the bottom of the log page. 11. Click Return returns to the System Log Entry Selection finder. 12. Close this page.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Viewing the Integration Log File 13. Click Order Management > Process Management. 14. Under Logs, click Integration. The Integration Log Entry Selection page opens. • Note the From field. You can enter a date and time from which you want to view log entries. For this demonstration, we will not change the date and time. • Note the Message Classes drop-down list which contains the following options. Note: If no message classes are selected, all are included in the log. − I (Informational) - Describes an event. Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing the System Log File Chapter 1 - Page 307

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

− W (Warning) - Describes the precondition to an error. − E (Error) - Describes a failure to complete processing. • Note the Search For field. To find one or more specific log items, enter data in the Search For field. For example, you can search for a transmission number. Numbers, letters, and other characters can be entered. • Note the Ignore Case check box. If needed, mark Ignore Case for your query. • Note the Entries per Page field. If needed, change the number entries per page to appear in the log. 100 is the default. 15. Click View Results at the bottom of the page. OTM displays the log file. • Note the Time column that displays when this entry occurred. The time is pulled from the OTM server and may differ from the time on your workstation. • Note the other columns which include: − Transmission − Transaction − Written By − Class − Code − Integration Log 16. Click Return to return to the log selection page. 17. Close the page.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing the System Log File Chapter 1 - Page 308

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Guided Demonstration 2 - Creating a User Log File Viewing the Setup of a User Log File 1. Click Configuration and Administration > Power Data > General > Log Files. 2. Click Search at the bottom of the page. 3. Click the ID containing ADMIN. • If you are creating a user log file, its log ID must match a system user name, without its DOMAIN/SUBDOMAIN prefix. For example, if the user name is GUEST.ADMIN, the log ID would be ADMIN. • In this example, the Domain Name to be monitored is COREDEMO. 4. Ensure that the Type of User is selected. The following options are available in the Type drop-down list: • Ad Hoc - For logging selected business processes, such as integration and bulk planning. • System - For logging events throughout the system. • User - For logging the events pertaining to a specific user. If using this type, the ID must match a user, for example, Admin. • Web - Controls web server logging. 5. Verify that the On check box is marked. It is marked by default. This activates this log. 6. Note the Filename of coredemoadmin.log. OTM saves your log entries to a file with this name. By default, OTM saves the log file to /logs/. 7. Ensure that the Append check box is marked. It is marked by default. • If you do not mark the Append check box, OTM deletes the log file at each new session. • Note the entry of Max Size (in bytes) of 10000000. OTM starts a new log file when reaching this limit. • Note the entry of Backups is 5. This indicates the number of backups of the file to be saved. For example, if you specify three backups of files 10 MB in size, a total of 30 MB of log files will be saved. The default setting is 5. • Logging does affect performance. It is not recommended to increase the maximum size. Rather than increase the size, you may want to increase the number of backups. 8. Scroll down to see a list of processes in the Log File Details section. • This section contains a list of Process IDs that you can configure for a log. • Refer to the OTM online help for a list of all Process IDs. 9. In the On list, select Agent. 10. Click the < Move Left icon to move the Process ID of Agents to the Off list. This turns this type of logging off. 11. Click Finished at the top of the page.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Viewing the Resulting User Log File 12. Click Order Management > Process Management. 13. Under Logs, click System. Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 2 - Creating a User Log File Chapter 1 - Page 309

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

14. Change the From date to the day before today. 15. Select a Log of ADMIN. 16. Click View Results at the bottom of the page. The data contained in a user log file is identical to what you saw earlier in the system log file with one exception: you only see the log information for the specific domain name that this log is attached to which, in this case, is COREDEMO. When viewing log files, you can navigate between backup files. If you are viewing a particular backup file (either via a search all backups or an explicit backup view), you can click Next at the end of the file to move to the next backup file.

Logging for Oracle Technical Support Default Logging Settings Depending on the issue you have run into, you may need to provide additional information or enable different logging options. As a rule, Oracle Technical Support likes you to have the following logging options enabled in the system log: • Agent • Planning • Workflow • WorkflowDetails Note: Some logging options write a great deal of information to the logs and should be disabled unless you need to investigate a particular issue. This is especially true for Sql, OrderBundlingDetails, PlanningDetails, RateEngineDebug, and RateEngineDetails.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r t Logs aTurn onsein the Troubleshooting OTM – What (to k tt you careenworking in and the problem type, technical support will Depending on the area of OTM u m li enabled. To see a list of logs to enable when while i options like to have differentth logging e l n My Oracle troubleshooting, asee ab Support note # 387267.1. r k i l e f Hu rans k i t arth non-

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 2 - Creating a User Log File Chapter 1 - Page 310

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Appendix B: Importing and Exporting Static Data via CSV

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Appendix B: Importing and Exporting Static Data via CSV Chapter 1 - Page 311

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing the Data Dictionary To learn what tables contain foreign keys into other tables, you can look in the OTM Data Dictionary. The OTM Data Dictionary contains all tables and their columns in the OTM database. When OTM is installed, you can find the OTM Data Dictionary under http:/servername/html/data_dict as detailed in the steps below. The following steps are recommended so that the data dictionary opens in the online help window instead of replacing the OTM window: 1. The easiest way to view the Data Dictionary it to first click the Help button at the top of the OTM page. 2. In the Address bar of your browser, delete all text after html/ and type data_dict. 3. Press Enter to view the Data Dictionary. 4. Next, scroll down until you see the LOCATION_REMARK table link in the left-hand pane. 5. Click the LOCATION_REMARK table link. B. This frame shows details of one table at a time.

om c ฺ le eฺ c D. There is an asterisk a next to primary keys. or notes. C. There are additional uid @ G t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

s ) ha

A. This frame shows all tables.

K

E. This frame shows additional notes as indicated by C.

The following text adds more detail about each of the callouts in the graphic above:

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing the Data Dictionary Chapter 1 - Page 312

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

− A. The table list frame on the left shows all of the tables in the OTM database exactly as they are named in the database. The tables are listed in alphabetical order in this frame. − B. The largest frame on the right side shows the details of one table at a time. To view table details here, click on a table name link in the table list frame. Table details include: − Table name − All rows in the table along with what type of data can be entered into that row. − There may be a brief listing of what type of data can or cannot be entered into that row (e.g., VARCHAR, NUMBER, DATE). − For some row names, you will see a link proceeded by FK which stands for foreign key. This indicates that this row is a foreign key to the table in the link. − Directly following the list of all rows, you may see a list titled “Tables that FK into this one”. Click on any link in this list to view the information on that table. − C. If you see an “I” icon next to the field name, this means there is more information available about that field. Click the “I” icon to see the information in the bottom-most frame on the page. − D. All primary keys have an asterisk before the row name. − E. The bottom-most frame lists any notes available for the selected table or row. Close the OTM Data Dictionary page.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n 6. a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Viewing the Data Dictionary Chapter 1 - Page 313

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Guided Demonstration 2 - Exporting CSV Data Exporting CSV Data To export OTM data in CSV format, you need to decide what to export, where to put the result, and how to export. 1. Click Business Process Automation > Data Import/Export > CSV Export. Using the default settings, OTM asks what you want to export. 2. Click the Export Object Type drop-down list to see the options. You can export: • Export Table – Exports one table at a time. • Export Table Set – Exports all tables in a table set. • Export Query Results – Exports all tables in a SQL query. 3. Select an Export Object Type of Export Table. 4. Click the Output Destination drop-down list to see the options. You can export to: • Browser – Exports data to your browser. • Remote Instance – Exports data to a remote OTM instance. • File On WebServer – Exports data to a file on your OTM server. 5. Select an Output Destination of Browser. • Note the Run Job in Background drop-down list. OTM processes your export in the background and emails you the result when it has finished processing. The values are N for No and Y for Yes. The default is N. 6. Click Run at the bottom of the page. The next page is displayed. The fields on this page vary depending on your selections for the above fields. The various versions of this page are not reviewed in this class. 7. Verify that the Command is xcsv which will export CSV files without any parent or child data. 8. Select a Table Name of CORPORATION. The tableName drop-down list includes all tables in the OTM database from which you can export data. 9. Verify that the Exclude Public drop-down list is set to Y for yes. If set to N, OTM will also export any data found in the PUBLIC domain. 10. Enter a Where Clause of CORPORATION_GID = ‘COREDEMO.BIG TEXAN TRUCKING’. This is a SQL where clause. 11. Click Run. Note: Due to an issue with Internet Explorer 9, you may see incorrect results on the normal OTM integration page. To work around this issue, complete step 9 below to see the expected output. 12. Right-click and select View Source. 13. Select the contents (usually rows 16 through 19) of the output. 14. Right-click and select Copy. 15. Open Notepad. 16. Paste the content into Notepad.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 2 - Exporting CSV Data Chapter 1 - Page 314

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

17. 18. 19. 20.

Click File > Save As. Select a Save as type of All Files. Save the file locally as CORPORATION.CSV. Close Notepad.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 2 - Exporting CSV Data Chapter 1 - Page 315

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Practice 1 - Exporting an OTM Corporation as a CSV File Exporting CSV Data To export OTM data in CSV format, you need to decide what to export, where to put the result, and how to export. 1. Click Business Process Automation > Data Import/Export > CSV Export. 2. Ensure that an Export Object Type value of Export Table is selected. 3. Ensure that an Output Destination value of Browser is selected. 4. Click Run at the bottom of the page. 5. Select a Table Name of CORPORATION. 6. Enter a Where Clause of CORPORATION_GID = ‘CORE###.BIG TEXAN TRUCKING’ where CORE### is your student domain name. Note: You must type the Where Clause exactly as shown above. Be very careful about adding the spaces in the appropriate places. This is an SQL query and as a result it must be exact. Also if you named the Corporation ID on your BBT9 Service Provider something other than BIG TEXAN TRUCKING, you need to reflect that in your SQL query. Note: Do not copy and paste the Where Clause text from the PDF file. The copy and paste may bring in extra unwanted control characters which can cause the CSV export to fail. 7. Click Run at the bottom of the page. Note: Due to an issue with Internet Explorer 9, you may see incorrect results on the normal OTM integration page. To work around this issue, complete step 8 below to see the expected output. 8. Right-click and select View Source. 9. Select the contents (usually rows 16 through 19) of the output. 10. Right-click and select Copy. 11. Open Notepad. 12. Paste the content into Notepad. 13. Click File > Save As. 14. Select a Save as type of All Files. 15. Save the file locally as CORPORATION.CSV. 16. Close Notepad.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 1 - Exporting an OTM Corporation as a CSV File Chapter 1 - Page 316

a

Solution – Exporting an OTM Corporation as a CSV File

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

You have successfully exported the CORPORATION.CSV file from OTM.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Exporting an OTM Corporation as a CSV File Chapter 1 - Page 317

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Practice 2 - Editing the Corporation CSV File Edit the corporation CSV file so that it is a new and unique corporation that you can upload into your OTM domain. 1. Open Notepad. 2. In Notepad, click File > Open…. Notepad displays the Open window. 3. Next to Files of type:, select All Files. 4. Navigate to location in which you saved the CORPORATION.CSV file. This is the file that you created in the previous practice. 5. Double-click the CORPORATION.CSV file to open it. Notepad displays the file. 6. Click Edit > Replace… . 7. Enter a Find what of BIG TEXAN TRUCKING. 8. Enter a Replace with of your SOUTHWEST TRUCKING. Note: Remember to use only uppercase characters. 9. Click Replace All. 10. Click Cancel. 11. Delete the date entry similar to "20140416193637" from the end of the line that starts with “CORE###.SOUTHWEST TRUCKING”. Warning: Do not delete the last three commas (,) that appear on the line. They must remain in the CSV file. 12. Click File > Save. 13. Close Notepad.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 2 - Editing the Corporation CSV File Chapter 1 - Page 318

a

Solution – Editing the Corporation CSV File

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

You successfully edited the CORPORATON.CSV file to include a new corporation.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution – Editing the Corporation CSV File Chapter 1 - Page 319

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Guided Demonstration 3 - Importing a CSV File This demonstration reviews how to upload a single CSV file into OTM using the Integration Manager. 1. In OTM, click Business Process Automation > Integration > Integration Manager. 2. Click Upload an XML/CSV Transmission. OTM displays the Upload an XML/CSV Transmission page. 3. Click Browse… to the right of the What XML/CSV file do you want to upload? field. 4. Select a CSV file to upload. You can use the CORPORATION.CSV file that you created in Guided Demonstration 2. 5. Click Upload. OTM displays this page after you click Upload.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l b an erafield, k i • In the Command select the appropriate transaction code. The values include: l f u ns H a CSV data into the database. k − i-–trInserts i h t ar no−nii – Insert and ignore which inserts data, while suppressing unique key constraint

K

•

•

violations. − u – Updates data in the database. − uu – Updates data, while suppressing “no data found” constraint violations. − d – Deletes data from the database. − dd – Deletes data, while suppressing “no data found” constraint violations. − iu – Insert and update which attempts to insert data. If a record with this primary key already exists, OTM updates the data. − rc – Replace children which deletes all child data corresponding to the top level parent, updates the top level parent, and inserts the new child data. The Data Directory field is where OTM can find the file specified in the Data File Name field. − This field will default to a temporary folder on the server where your CSV file is uploaded to prior to updating the database. The Data File Name field contains the name of the file that you recently selected to upload in the Upload XML/CSV Transmission page. Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 3 - Importing a CSV File Chapter 1 - Page 320

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

•

•

•

If you select Run SQL Loader, OTM uses the Oracle sqlloader program to import the CSV file instead of a java procedure. − If you have sqlloader installed on the web server, the sqlloader is faster than the java procedure. However, this will only work if sqlloader is installed on the OTM web server. The following line must be added to the jserv.properties file to make sqlloader run from the web: wrapper.path = d:/product/oracle/ora81/bin This entry will differ depending on the location of the Oracle bin directory. Xvalidate drop-down list allows you to turn on or off diagnostic messaging. − Y – OTM gives you more diagnostics messages. This is the default. − N – OTM turns off diagnostics messages. Encoding is where you indicate the encoding of the file you import. − Common settings are ISO-8859-1 and UTF-8 (default). You especially need to consider this when you import data containing characters outside the 7-bit ASCII set. Also, consider the encoding of your database. − If your file contains standard ASCII characters, then it can be encoded as ISO-88591. If it contains non-standard, international characters, then it should be encoded as UTF-8.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 3 - Importing a CSV File Chapter 1 - Page 321

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Practice 3 - Importing Your Edited Corporation CSV File In this practice, you import the CORPORATION.CSV file that you created previously into OTM. 1. In OTM, click Business Process Automation > Integration > Integration Manager. 2. Click Upload an XML/CSV Transmission. OTM displays the Upload an XML/CSV Transmission page. 3. Click Browse… to the right of the What XML/CSV file do you want to upload? field. 4. Select the CORPORATION.CSV file that you edited in Practice 2. 5. Click Upload. 6. In the command drop-down list, select i for insert. 7. Leave all of the other fields on this page in their default settings. 8. Click Run at the bottom of the page. Note: Due to an issue with Internet Explorer 9, you may see incorrect results on the normal OTM integration page. To work around this issue, complete step 9 below to see the expected output. 9. Right-click and select View Source. You should see a page with HTML text similar to the following. Note the ProcessCount which should be 1.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t t ent u m i h Stud t - n ika this - l u i ฺh use k i /opt/oracle123/temp/upload/ h art se to CORPORATION.CSV k ( true utt licen - im th able true n a 123456 ulik nsfer CORPORATION H ik n-tra h t r no CORPORATION_GID,CORPORATION_XID,CORPORATION_NAME,IS_ Ka DOMAIN_MASTER,IS_SHIPPING_AGENTS_ACTIVE,IS_ALLOW_HOUSE_COLLECT, MAX_HOUSE_COLLECT_AMT,MAX_HOUSE_COLLECT_CURRENCY_GID,MAX_HOU SE_COLLECT_AMT_BASE,PICKUP_ROUTING_SEQUENCE_GID,DROPOFF_ROUTIN G_SEQUENCE_GID,DOMAIN_NAME,INSERT_USER,INSERT_DATE,UPDATE_USER, UPDATE_DATE insert into CORPORATION ( CORPORATION_GID,CORPORATION_XID,CORPORATION_NAME,IS_DOMAIN_MA STER,IS_SHIPPING_AGENTS_ACTIVE,IS_ALLOW_HOUSE_COLLECT,MAX_HOUSE _COLLECT_AMT,MAX_HOUSE_COLLECT_CURRENCY_GID,MAX_HOUSE_COLLECT _AMT_BASE,PICKUP_ROUTING_SEQUENCE_GID,DROPOFF_ROUTING_SEQUENC E_GID,DOMAIN_NAME,INSERT_USER,INSERT_DATE,UPDATE_USER,UPDATE_DA TE) values (?,?,?,?,?,?,?,?,?,?,?,?,?,?,?,?) 1 0 0



Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 3 - Importing Your Edited Corporation CSV File Chapter 1 - Page 322

a

Solution - Importing Your Edited Corporation CSV File

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

You successfully imported a new corporation into OTM using a CSV file.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution - Importing Your Edited Corporation CSV File Chapter 1 - Page 323

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Practice 4 - Verifying New Corporation Now Exists in OTM Make sure the corporation in your CSV file now exists in OTM. 1. In OTM, click Shipment Management > Power Data. 2. Click Location > Corporations. 3. Enter a Corporation ID of SOUTH. 4. Click Search at the bottom of the page. You should see the Corporations results page with an entry of CORE###.SOUTHWEST TRUCKING. 5. Click the ID to view your new corporation.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Practice 4 - Verifying New Corporation Now Exists in OTM Chapter 1 - Page 324

a

Solution - Verifying New Corporation Now Exists in OTM

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

You verified that the new corporation of SOUTHWEST TRUCKING exists in your domain.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Solution - Verifying New Corporation Now Exists in OTM Chapter 1 - Page 325

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Appendix C1: Configuring Pre-scheduled Milk Runs

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Appendix C1: Configuring Pre-scheduled Milk Runs Chapter 1 - Page 326

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Appendix C2: Creating Trip Templates

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Appendix C2: Creating Trip Templates Chapter 1 - Page 327

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Guided Demonstration 1 - Copying a Static Trip Template Copying a Static Trip Template 1. Click Operational Planning > Schedule Management > Ground Schedule. 2. Enter a Ground Schedule ID of TRIP BASE. 3. Click Search at the bottom of the page. 4. Mark the check box. 5. Click Actions > Copy Ground Schedule. 6. Enter a Ground Schedule ID of TRIP STATIC. • Note the Schedule Type. The schedule type differentiates between the different concepts of ground schedules in a rate service and trip templates. It is also here you decide whether to create a static or a dynamic trip template. • Note the Frequency. All trip templates assume you work with a weekly schedule. You specify for what days of the week OTM should create trips based on your trip template. • Note the Service Provider ID. Each trip template is specific to one service provider. • Note the Equipment Group ID. This controls what equipment group OTM should use when creating trips for this trip template. • Note the Ignore Equipment Capacity check box. This controls whether OTM should allow you to move more weight, volume, and transport handling units to a trip than the equipment group allows. If OTM cannot fit your order release on a specific trip, OTM tries a later trip. 7. Delete the Discontinue Date. • Note that there is no Discontinue Date. OTM only uses trip templates that have an active time window. 8. Click Edit (the pencil icon) next to the second stop. You must specify at least two stops in each trip template. • Note the Sequence Number and Stop Number. The sequence number is just a unique identifier while the stop number determines in what order OTM should use the stops. • Note the Location ID. This is the location of this stop. Since this is a static trip template, OTM disregards any stop times on your location. • Note the Stop Requirement Type of MANDATORY. OTM can delete OPTIONAL stops from a trip if no order release uses this location. OTM always keeps MANDATORY stops on a trip even if the stop seems to be unnecessary. • Note the Allow Pickup check box, Max Pickup Weight, and Max Pickup Volume fields. OTM uses pickup and delivery constraints to limit what order releases you can add to a trip. The equipment constraints you enter on the trip template level are independent of the stop level constraints. For example, OTM uses both Allow Pickup and Allow Delivery constraints even if you select the Ignore Equipment Capacity check box. • Note the Repetition Schedule Activity ID. For each stop, you must specify both an ARRIVE and a DEPART time. • Note the Day Adjustment. If you generate a trip for December 1, a day adjustment of 1 means that the trip will arrive December 2. • Note the Hour Adjustment and Minute Adjustment. These define the time of day. 9. Click Save at the bottom of the page.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Copying a Static Trip Template Chapter 1 - Page 328

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

10. Click Finished at the top of the page. 11. Close the confirmation page.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Copying a Static Trip Template Chapter 1 - Page 329

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Guided Demonstration 2 - Creating a Dynamic Trip Template Creating a Dynamic Trip Template Dynamic trip templates are similar to static trip templates so we will focus on what is different compared to static trip templates. 1. Click Operational Planning > Schedule Management > Ground Schedule. 2. Click New at the bottom of the page. 3. Enter a Ground Schedule ID of TRIP DYNAMIC. 4. Select a Schedule Type of DYNAMIC TRIP. 5. Mark the checkboxes for Monday through Friday. 6. Enter a Service Provider ID of TT99. 7. Enter an Equipment Group ID of 48FT DRY VAN. • Controls what equipment group OTM should use when creating trips for this trip template. • Note the Ignore Equipment Capacity check box. Since a dynamic trip template specifies no stop times, OTM must estimate stop times for the trip. Depending on the Ignore Equipment Capacity check box, OTM can do one of the following: • Feed max volume and max weight into the variable stop time calculation for each stop. (Worst case estimation) • Divide the effective volume and effective weight on the equipment group with the number of stops and feed those values into the variable stop time calculation for each stop. (Average estimation) 8. Enter a Start Time Adjustment of 7 H. This is the start time for each trip. The adjustment is relative to midnight of each day the trip template starts. For example, to start each trip at 8:00AM, enter 0D 8H 0M. OTM will add the stop times on each stop location to derive stop times. 9. Click New Stop at the bottom of the page. 10. Enter a Sequence Number of 1. • Note the Drive Time From Prev Stop. For each stop in your dynamic trip template, you must specify the drive time between stops. OTM calculates the trip stop times as:

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Location N

Drive Time

Depart time

Location N+1

Arrive time= =depart time at prev. stop + drive time

Depart time= = arrive time + fixed stop time + variable stop time

Note that you control what weights and volumes OTM should use for the variable stop time with the Ignore Equipment Constraints check box. − Marking the check box expands the stop times the most, a worst case scenario. Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 2 - Creating a Dynamic Trip Template Chapter 1 - Page 330

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

11.

12. 13. 14.

15.

− Clearing the check box expands the stop times with an average weight and volume. Enter a Stop Number of 1. • OTM hides the Drive Time From Prev Stop field. You leave the drive time empty for the first stop, since you are not driving to your first stop. Instead the depart time from your first stop is the Start Time Adjustment. Enter a Location ID of JEWELPOOL. Select a Stop Requirement Type of MANDATORY. Mark Allow Pickup. • OTM uses pickup and delivery constraints to limit what order releases you can add to a trip. The equipment constraints you enter on the trip template level are independent of the stop level constraints. For example, OTM uses both Allow Pickup and Allow Delivery constraints even if you mark the Ignore Equipment Capacity checkbox. Click Save at the bottom of the page.

s ) ha

om c ฺ OTM displays the Ground Schedule Manager page with the new stop added. le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 2 - Creating a Dynamic Trip Template Chapter 1 - Page 331

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Guided Demonstration 3 - Creating an Itinerary and a Rate Offering Creating an Itinerary for Trips 1. Click Shipment Management > Itinerary Management > Itinerary Manager. 2. Enter an Itinerary ID of MI-MI TL. 3. Click Search at the bottom of the page. 4. Mark the check box next to the ID. 5. Click Copy Itinerary at the top of the page. 6. Enter an Itinerary ID of TRIP ITINERARY. 7. Select an Itinerary Type of ACTIVE. 8. Click Lane Definitions at the bottom of the page. 9. Click List Legs at the bottom of the page. 10. Click Edit (the pencil icon) next to the leg. • Note the Rate Offering ID. As always, you need matching rates, to be able to execute your shipments or trips. Often you have only one rate that has been negotiated specifically for this milk run, so you can refer to it directly from your itinerary leg. • Note the Equipment Assignment Type. Your trip template specifies what equipment OTM must use so you should select the option No Equipment. • In the Compatibility section, note the Equipment Group Profile ID. Your trip template specifies what equipment OTM must use. Still, this page requires you to enter something in the Equipment Group Profile ID. 11. Enter a Ground Schedule ID of TRIP STATIC in the Schedules section. 12. Click Save to the right of the Ground Schedule ID field. • Note the Ground Schedule ID. You must refer to at least one static or dynamic trip template here for OTM to find what trips to put your orders on. 13. Click Save at the bottom of the page. 14. Click Finished at the top of the page. 15. Close the confirmation page.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

Viewing a Rate for Trips 16. Click Contract and Rate Management > Contract Management > Rate Offering. 17. Enter a Rate Offering ID of TT99. 18. Click Search at the bottom of the page. 19. Click the ID. 20. Click the TRIP link in the Rate Service ID field. Even though this page requires you to specify a rate service on your rate offering, OTM uses your trip template instead of your rate service to calculate your transit time.

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 3 - Creating an Itinerary and a Rate Offering Chapter 1 - Page 332

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Itinerary/Leg

Rate Offering

Rate Service

Unused Transit Time information

Trip Template

om c ฺ le eฺ Trips c a or Guid @ t 21. Close the Rate Service page. ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

s ) ha

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 3 - Creating an Itinerary and a Rate Offering Chapter 1 - Page 333

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Appendix C3: Working with Templates

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Appendix C3: Working with Templates Chapter 1 - Page 334

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Guided Demonstration 1 - Generating Trips Based on your trip template, you generate trips (empty shipments) for a certain time period. These dates determine how many trips OTM creates: • Schedule Cutoff Time –Displays how far into the future you have already generated trips for the specified trip template. • Generating Start Time and Generating End Time – Each time you run the Generate Shipments action, you specify the date for your first trip and your last trip. You can specify the time period as week number and year or as start date plus duration. If your cutoff time is… Earlier than your generating time period Cutoff Time

Generating Start Time

Generating End Time

Then OTM generates… Trips from your cutoff time to the end of your generating time period

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ Generating Time Period le eฺ c a or Guid @ t tfrom your cutoff In your generating time period ut dTrips n e m i to the end of your Generating Generating h Stu time Cutoff Time t Start Time End Time n generating time period a s k i i l h ฺhu use t k i Generating Time th Period to r a t (k ense t u Later than your generating No new trips lic period im le time h t Generating Generating n b Cutoff Time a Start Time ra End Time k i l e f Hu rans k i t -generates th always n trips from the cutoff time no matter when you specify to start generating o arOTM n

trips. This ensures that you generate all trips for every week. This is true even if you delete trips you have generated previously. If you choose to work with start dates and durations, consider the time of day for your start date. If the generating time period ends at a time of day that is before the last stop time on your trip template, OTM does not generate a trip for that day. If you work with week numbers instead, the time of day is always midnight. Generating Trips 1. Click Operational Planning > Schedule Management > Ground Schedule. 2. Enter a Ground Schedule ID of TRIP STATIC. 3. Click Search at the bottom of the page. 4. Mark the check box next to the ID. 5. Click Actions > Generate Shipments. OTM displays the Generate Shipments page. 6. Enter a From Date of next Monday. 7. Enter a To Date of next Friday. Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Generating Trips Chapter 1 - Page 335

a

8.

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19.

Click Ok. OTM displays the Generate Shipments page. This page shows the Ground Schedule ID and Shipments Expected. Click Continue. OTM displays the Ground Schedule Results page. Click Refresh until you see a time in the Process End Time field. How many shipments were built? There should be 5. Click the link for shipments built. OTM displays the Shipments Built page. Close the Shipments Built page. Close the Ground Schedule Results page. Click Shipment Management > Shipment Management > Buy Shipments. Click the General tab. Enter a Ground Schedule ID of TRIP STATIC. Click Search at the bottom of the page. Note the first five shipments OTM generated and their estimated start time.

s ) ha

K

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid Shipment ID Start Time @ t t ut denYork 010### (shipment ID 1) YYYY-MM-DD 05:00 AM America/New m i th Stu York n 010### (shipment ID 2) YYYY-MM-DD 05:00 AM America/New a k this uli05:00 010### (shipment ID 3) YYYY-MM-DD h ฺ eAM America/New York k s i u h 010### (shipment ID 4) rt e to 05:00 AM America/New York aYYYY-MM-DD k ( ns 010### (shipment ID 5) 05:00 AM America/New York tt YYYY-MM-DD e u c i m l hi ble t n a for theerfirst a shipment. 20. Click the liklink f u s H the Status 21. k Click an button. r i t h t n the OTM Status of RESERVATION_OPEN ar • noNote

22. Close the Statuses page. 23. Click the Stops tab. 24. Click the pencil icon next to the first stop to edit it. • Note the Planned Arrival Time and Planned Departure Time. These match what was entered on the ground schedule.

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 1 - Generating Trips Chapter 1 - Page 336

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Guided Demonstration 2 - Planning Order Releases Bulk Planning Order Releases 1. Click Order Management > Order Release> Order Release. 2. Enter an Order Release ID of TRIP. 3. Enter a Total Gross Weight of 10000 LB. 4. Click Search at the bottom of the page. 5. Mark the check boxes next to the Order Releases: TRIP1-001, TRIP2-001, TRIP3-001. 6. Click Actions > Operational Planning > Create Buy Shipment > Bulk Plan – Buy. 7. Click OK. 8. Wait a few seconds. 9. Click Refresh at the bottom of the page. 10. Note the following information. Question

Answer

om c ฺ le eฺ c a Total Number of Stops 7 or Guid @ t Orders Planned 3 ut dent m i Service Provider ID TT99 th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ 11. Click the link in the Shipments Built field. ik o us h t r 12. Click the Shipment ID. a se t k ( t of the npage near the top. tside 13. Click Status on the right e u c i m l • Note the status hi values. t leOTM leaves the RESERVATION status as OPEN. n b a a 14. Close the Statusesepage. r f uthelikStops s H 15. Click tab. an kNote the-tfollowing r i h t 16. information: ar non

s ) ha

Shipments Built

K

1

Location

Arrive Time

Depart Time

JEWELPOOL

5:00

5:10

CHAIN

6:30

6:35

CLASP

7:00

7:05

AMBER

7:35

7:40

JADE

8:10

8:15

OPAL

9:45

9:50

JEWELPOOL

10:20

10:25

17. Close the Buy Shipment page and bulk planning page.

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 2 - Planning Order Releases Chapter 1 - Page 337

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Guided Demonstration 3 - Releasing Trips Releasing the Trip 1. Click Order Management > Order Release> Order Release. 2. Enter an Order Release ID of TRIP1. 3. Click Search. 4. Right-click on the ID TRIP1-001 and select Related Buy Shipments. 5. Mark the check box. 6. Click Actions > Operational Planning > Utilities > Release Schedule Instance. OTM rates your trip, calculates shipment stop times, and removes unused, optional stops. 7. Close the Release Schedule Instance confirmation page. 8. Click the ID of the shipment. 9. Note the shipment ID. 10. Click the Stops tab. • OTM removes all stops marked as optional and have no pickup or delivery activity. For a static trip template with only mandatory stops like this, there is no difference. 11. Click the Identification tab, the first tab. 12. Click the Status button. • Note the status values. OTM sets the RESERVATION status to CLOSED. 13. Close the statuses page.

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 3 - Releasing Trips Chapter 1 - Page 338

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

Guided Demonstration 4 - Adding Order Releases to a Trip Manually Assigning an Order Release to a Trip 1. Click Order Management > Order Release > Order Release. 2. Enter an Order Release ID of TRIPEXTRA. 3. Click Search at the bottom of the page. 4. Mark the check box next to the ID. 5. Click Actions > Operational Planning > Create Buy Shipment > Move Order to Existing Shipment. OTM displays the Move Order to Shipment page. 6. Click the Select Shipment option. 7. Enter the Shipment ID that you noted previously. 8. Mark Consolidate Equipment. 9. Click OK. 10. Click the ID. 11. Scroll down to the Shipment Stops section. 12. Click the plus sign next to stop number 2. 13. Note that a new ship unit TRIPEXTRA has been added to the shipment. 14. Close the Buy Shipment page. 15. Close the Order – Move to Shipment page.

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

s ) ha

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 4 - Adding Order Releases to a Trip Chapter 1 - Page 339

a

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibitedฺ Copyright© 2013, Oracle and/or its affiliatesฺ

s ) ha

om c ฺ le eฺ c a or Guid @ t ut dent m i th Stu n a ulik e this h ฺ ik o us h t r a se t k ( tt cen u m li i h e t l an erab k i l u nsf H ik n-tra h t r a no

K

Copyright © 2014, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Guided Demonstration 4 - Adding Order Releases to a Trip Chapter 1 - Page 340

a